JP7114336B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a game machine, there is a game machine that can move a character, which is a decoration, and displays an effect image corresponding to the movement of the character on a liquid crystal display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-92893 A

However, in Patent Literature 1, there is a problem that the performance effect cannot be enhanced.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the performance effect.

The gaming machine described in means A of the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of performance identification information and controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the derivation display of a specific display result,
a first movable body operable between an origin position and a position away from the origin position ;
a second movable body operable between an origin position and a position away from the origin position at a position different from the first movable body;
display means;
a detection means capable of detecting the action of the player;
specific effect execution means for operating the first movable body and the second movable body based on the detection of the action of the player by the detection means;
with
The display means is
The first character and the second character can be displayed, and the effect identification information can be displayed in a highlighted display mode that emphasizes that the specific display result is derived and displayed,
displaying the first character when the first movable body moves in a first direction;
displaying the second character when the second movable body moves in a second direction different from the first direction;
displaying the first character and the second character when the first movable body and the second movable body move in a third direction different from the first direction and the second direction;
When the specific display result is derived and displayed, different highlighting is performed depending on whether the first movable body moves in the first direction or the second movable body moves in the second direction. The production identification information can be displayed in a form,
The specific effect execution means is
When the first movable body and the second movable body are positioned at the origin position and the motion of the player is detected by the detection means, the first movable body and the second movable body are moved. Operate in the first operation mode,
When the first movable body and the second movable body are not positioned at the origin position and the motion of the player is detected by the detection means, the first movable body and the second movable body are moved. operate in the second operation mode;
It is characterized by
Furthermore, in order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to means 1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
a operably provided first movable body (eg, movable body 042SG302L);
a second movable body (for example, movable body 042SG302R) operably provided at a position different from the first movable body;
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
with
The display means is
capable of displaying a first character (eg, image 042SG5x shown in FIGS. 11-12) and a second character (eg, image 042SG5y shown in FIGS. 11-12);
When the first movable body is moved, the first character is displayed (for example, when only the movable body 042SG302L moves toward the production position, the image display device 5 The part where the image 042SG5x is displayed),
When the second movable body is moved, the second character is displayed (for example, when only the movable body 042SG302R moves toward the production position, the image display device 5 The part where the image 042SG5y is displayed),
The first character and the second character are displayed when the first movable body and the second movable body are moved (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-12, movable body 042SG302L and movable body 042SG302R When moving toward the production position, the part where the image 042SG5x and the image 042SG5y are displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for a player based on the derived display of a specific display result,
The display means is
It is possible to display a highlighting that emphasizes that the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. part),
The highlighting can be displayed in different modes depending on whether the first movable body is operated or the second movable body is operated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-12, the movable body 042SG302L The part where the decoration pattern is highlighted a plurality of times in the image display device 5 when only the movable body 042SG302R moves toward the effect position and when only the movable body 042SG302R moves toward the effect position)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect for being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
A third movable body (for example, movable body 042SG401) operable separately from the first movable body and the second movable body,
The third movable body operates after the first movable body and the second movable body operate (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the movable body 042SG401 falls after
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the third movable body.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The first movable body and the second movable body are
It is movable between a first position (for example, a standby position on the left and right sides of the image display device 5) and a second position (for example, a production position in front of the image display device 5),
The first movable body moves to a third position between the first position and the second position when the first character is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-12). , the movable body 042SG302L moves to the preparation position between the standby position and the performance position and stops temporarily when the image 042SG5x is displayed on the image display device 5),
The second movable body moves to a third position when the second character is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. When 042SG5y is displayed, it moves to the preparation position between the standby position and the production position and stops temporarily)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first movable body and the second movable body can be preferably moved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
detection means (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B) capable of detecting the action of the player;
The first movable body and the second movable body are moved based on detection of the action of the player over a predetermined period by the detection means during the effective period (for example, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B). A specific effect execution means (for example, a performance A portion where the control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 11-24);
with
The specific effect execution means is
When the action of the player is detected by the detection means in the first situation, the first movable body and the second movable body are operated in the first action mode (for example, the characteristic portion As shown in FIG. 11-28 of 177SG, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. A portion that causes the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to operate at high speed and low torque),
When the motion of the player is detected by the detection means in a second situation different from the first situation, the first movable body and the second movable body are put into a second motion mode. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-28 of the characteristic portion 177SG, when the push button 31B is operated in a state in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not arranged at the origin position, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode to operate the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R at low speed).
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
Predetermined state (for example, a state of executing a predetermined effect (super reach effect) or a state of detecting an error. Predetermined game state (low probability low base state (normal state), low probability high base state ( Time-saving state), high-probability low-base state (latent state), high-probability high-base state (probability variable state)) and controllable state control means (may be in a state controlled to a specific production mode) ( For example, in the effect control CPU120, by executing the step S172 portion to control the state of executing the super reach effect and a portion to detect an error in the game control microcomputer 100. In addition, for game control In the microcomputer 100, a portion that controls to a predetermined game state, a portion that controls to a predetermined effect mode, or a portion that executes a predetermined effect in the effect control CPU 120),
A special effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the super reach effect by performing step S172) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a super reach effect);
A display control means (for example, a part for performing a first telop effect by performing step S172 in the effect control CPU 120 that can display a display related to the predetermined state (for example, a telop display) on the display means, and a step A part that performs a second telop effect when a command indicating that an error has been detected in S75 is received)
The display control means is
During execution of the special effect, the related display can be displayed in a predetermined mode accompanied by action (for example, a first stage in which characters move at a medium speed),
Depending on the change in the mode of the special effect, the mode of the related display is changed from the predetermined mode to a special mode with a different operation speed from the predetermined mode (for example, a second stage in which the characters move at a high speed, and a special mode in which the characters move at a low speed). For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S172, so that in the first half of the super reach effect (before performing the cut-in display), the first stage One telop display 115IW10 is performed, the first telop display 115IW10 is performed in the second stage in the latter half of the super ready-to-win effect (after the cut-in display), and the first telop display 115IW10 is performed in the third stage immediately before the fluctuation stop. Do (see Figure 8-1 of characteristic part 38SG))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be improved.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the pachinko game machine 1 with which the characteristic part 115IW is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the pachinko game machine 1 with which the characteristic part 115IW is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the pachinko game machine 1 with which the characteristic part 115IW is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the pachinko game machine 1 with which the characteristic part 115IW is provided. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration of an image display device, the display state of the image display device, and the viewing state of a stereoscopic image with both eyes of a player; (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation of a movable object effect. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing details of an example of the effect operation of the first movable body effect, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of an image display. It is a figure which shows a modification. 177SG is a front view of the game machine according to the characteristic part. 177SG is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in a game machine related to the characteristic part of 177SG. FIG. (A) is a front view showing a state in which the movable body of the rendering device relating to the characteristic portion of 177SG is at the first position, and (B) is a state in which the movable body of the rendering device related to the characteristic portion of 177SG is at the second position. is. 177SG is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the production device related to the characteristic part of the 177SG as seen obliquely from the front. FIG. 177SG is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the production device related to the characteristic part of the 177SG as seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 177SG is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the movable body related to the characterizing portion of the 177SG as seen obliquely from the front. FIG. 177SG is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the movable body related to the characterizing portion of the 177SG as seen obliquely from behind. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the rotating portion related to the characteristic portion of the 177SG is in the first projecting position, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the rotating portion related to the characteristic portion of the 177SG is in the retracted position. 177SG is a fragmentary cross-sectional view showing the structure of the lower part of the movable body relating to the characteristic part of 177SG. FIG. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of a first drive mechanism related to the characteristic portion of the 177SG, and (B) is a plan view showing the guided member related to the characteristic portion of the 177SG. 177SG is a plan view showing the relationship between the guide groove, the guided member, and the moving body, which are characteristic parts of the 177SG. FIG. (A) to (E) are diagrams showing the operation modes of the guided member and the movable portion relating to the feature of the 177SG. (F) to (J) are diagrams showing the operation modes of the guided member and the movable portion relating to the feature of the 177SG. (A) to (C) are schematic explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between the movable body and the image display device relating to the feature of the 177SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a movable body related to the characteristic portion of the 177SG is in a lowered position, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the movable body related to the characteristic portion of the 177SG is in a raised position. (A) and (B) are figures which illustrate the production|presentation control command which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. 177SG is an explanatory diagram showing each random number related to the characteristic part of 177SG. FIG. It is a figure which illustrates the variation pattern which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table relating to the characteristic portion of 177SG; (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table related to the characteristic portion of 177SG, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots related to the characteristic portion of 177SG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation control main process which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. 177SG is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example of non-detection time operation control, detection time operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control relating to the characteristic part of 177SG; FIG. 177SG is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation speed and the accessory motor drive mode in the operations of non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control according to the characteristic part of 177SG. 177SG is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect processing relating to the characteristic portion of 177SG. 177SG is a flow chart showing an example of performance accessory operation processing related to the feature part of 177SG. 177 SG is a flowchart showing an example of production accessory storage processing related to the feature part of 177SG. 177SG is an explanatory diagram for explaining a character product motor drive mode related to the characteristic part of 177SG. FIG. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the super reach type and the button control and accessory motor drive mode according to the feature of 177SG. (A) and (B) are timing charts showing the relationship between button operations and accessory motors relating to the features of the 177SG. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an operation mode of a movable body in Super Reach C, which is a feature of 177SG. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an operation mode of a movable body in Super Reach D, which is a feature of 177SG. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 042SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the standby position of each movable body, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing the rendering position of each movable body. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st production device, the 2nd production device, and the 3rd production device. It is sectional drawing of a 1st production|presentation apparatus, a 2nd production|presentation apparatus, and a 3rd production|presentation apparatus. It is a front view of a 2nd production|presentation apparatus. It is a back view which shows operation|movement of the movable body in a 3rd production|presentation apparatus. It is a back view which shows operation|movement of the movable body in a 3rd production|presentation apparatus. (A) is a diagram illustrating an effect control command, (B) is a relational diagram of effects executed during each ready-to-win effect, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of an interlocking effect and a combined effect. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of interlocking production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of union production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of information production|presentation.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "lost".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 115IW)
Next, the characterizing portion 115IW of this embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 provided in the characteristic portion 115IW is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, capable of being controlled to a predetermined state, capable of executing a special effect, and displaying a related display related to the predetermined state on the display means. It is possible. In addition, during the execution of the special effect, the related display can be displayed in a predetermined mode accompanied by an action, and according to the change in the mode of the special effect, the related display mode is changed from the predetermined mode to the special effect mode. It is configured to be able to change to a mode (a special mode having a different operation speed from the predetermined mode).

Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the characteristic portion 115IW can execute a telop effect of displaying a telop on the image display device 5 as the related display. As the telop effect, a first telop effect that displays a first telop display related to the effect state (specifically, characters suggesting that it is in super reach) and a second telop display related to the game state (specifically, Specifically, a second telop effect is provided to display a character suggesting that an error has been detected.

In the first telop presentation, the characters of the first telop display are moved and displayed, while in the second telop presentation, the characters of the second telop display are fixedly displayed.

In addition, as the stages of character movement speed in the first telop presentation, there are provided a first stage in which characters move at medium speed, a second stage in which characters move at high speed, and a third stage in which characters move at low speed. It is Specifically, when the first telop effect is performed, the first telop display is displayed in the first stage in the first half of the super ready-to-win effect, and the first telop display is displayed in the second stage in the second half of the super ready-to-win effect. Immediately before the fluctuation stops, the first telop display is displayed at the third stage. In this way, during execution of the super ready-to-win effect, the moving speed of characters in the first telop display is switched stepwise from medium speed to high speed to low speed.

8-1 to 8-4 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples in the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided in the characteristic portion 115IW.

In the display example shown in FIG. 8-1, the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variation pattern that develops into super reach at step S111 and becomes a big hit, and the effect control CPU 120 responds to the variation pattern at step S172. It is realized by performing a variable effect.

For example, first, a change is made, and the same pattern is stopped and displayed as the left and right patterns of the decoration pattern, thereby developing into a ready-to-win state (see FIG. 8-1 (1)), and developing into a super ready-to-win state, the image display device 5. A first telop display 115IW10 indicating that Super Reach is in progress is displayed at the lower left and upper right of (see FIG. 8-1 (2)). At this time, in the first telop display 115IW10 displayed in the lower left of the image display device 5, the characters move from the upper left to the lower right, while in the first telop display 115IW10 displayed in the upper right of the image display device 5, the characters move to the lower right. It is displayed so that the characters move from to the upper left direction. At this time, the movement speed of characters in the first telop display 115IW10 is at the first stage. In addition, the first telop display 115IW10 displayed on the lower left of the image display device 5 is displayed in a larger character than the first telop display 115IW10 displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5, so that the image display device The first telop display 115IW10 displayed on the lower left of the image display device 5 is visible on the near side (player side) than the first telop display 115IW10 displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5.

Although two first telop displays 115IW10 are displayed in FIG. 8-1, a single first telop display 115IW10 or three or more first telop displays 115IW10 may be displayed.

In addition, when displaying a plurality of first telop displays 115IW10, the display modes such as the size of the characters and display range, and the moving direction and moving speed of the characters may be unified. It can be different. Also, the contents of the characters may be the same or may be different. For example, one telop display may display "SP reach!", and the other telop display may display "If your friend character wins in SP reach, you win big!". Also, the degree of reliability of the big win may differ depending on the display mode of the telop and the contents of the characters.

Next, a cut-in display is performed at a predetermined timing during super reach (see FIG. 8-1 (3)), and the first telop display 115IW10 is once erased. When the cut-in display ends, the display corresponding to super reach and the first telop display 115IW10 are performed again on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 8-1(4)). At this time, the movement speed of the characters in the first telop display 115IW10 is switched to the second stage. As described above, in this example, the movement speed of the characters in the first telop display 115IW10 is switched with the execution of the cut-in display as a trigger, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the character movement speed may be switched from the first step to the second step without interrupting the display of the first telop display 115IW10.

Then, at the end of Super Reach, the display in the Super Reach production (display of a sword and an ax colliding) is displayed in slow motion (or stopped), and the movement speed of characters in the first telop display 115IW10 is It switches to the third stage (see FIG. 8-1 (5)). It should be noted that the first telop display 115IW10 may be displayed at a slower speed than in the second stage, and for example, the first telop display 115IW10 may be displayed in the first stage.

Finally, the super ready-to-win effect is completed and the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 8-1 (6)). Although an example of a big win is shown here, there is a possibility that a loss may occur after the display shown in FIG. 8-1(5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (5), the display in the super reach effect is displayed in slow motion, and after the character movement speed in the first telop display 115IW10 is switched to the third stage, further in the super reach effect The characters in the display or the first telop display 115IW10 may be stopped and displayed, and it may be possible to notify whether or not a big win is achieved based on a predetermined action (for example, pressing the push button 31B) by the player.

Note that the first telop display 115IW10 has characters displayed on an opaque background, but the background may be transparent.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 115IW, the mode (moving speed of characters) in the first telop display 115IW10 is switched corresponding to the display of the super ready-to-win effect. 115IW10 may be switched. For example, the mode (moving speed of characters) in the first telop display 115IW10 may be switched in accordance with the effect using the effect members other than the image display device 5, such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the movable body 32. Specifically, the mode (moving speed of characters) in the first telop display 115IW10 may be switched in accordance with the tempo and volume of the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the If the movable body 32 is provided at the first advanced position and the second advanced position, the movement speed of the characters in the first telop display 115IW10 is determined based on the position of the movable body 32 at the retracted position. is set to the first stage, and based on the movement to the first advanced position, the movement speed of the characters in the first telop display 115IW10 is switched to the second stage, and based on the movement to the second advanced position, the first telop The moving speed of characters in the display 115IW10 may be switched to the third stage.

In the display example shown in FIG. 8-2, the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variation pattern that develops into super reach at step S111 and becomes a big hit, and the effect control CPU 120 responds to the variation pattern at step S172. This is realized by performing the second telop effect when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command indicating that an error has been detected in step S75 while performing the variable effect. Note that detailed descriptions of the same parts as in FIG. 8-1 are omitted.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 (2), (4), and (5), for the first telop display 115IW10, the character speed changes according to the change in the development mode of the super ready-to-win effect, while the The 2 telop display 115IW20 is fixedly displayed without being affected by changes in the development mode of the super ready-to-win effect.

It should be noted that here, abnormal winning (the count switch 23 is turned on even though the big winning opening is closed, the second start opening switch 22B is turned on even though the variable winning ball device 6B is closed) (e.g. turning on), detection of abnormal electromagnetism, opening of the door provided in the game frame, and detection of errors such as the ball supply tray (upper tray) being full. .

In addition, in FIG. 8B, the second telop display 115IW20 is continuously displayed from the start of the change until the end of the change. Alternatively, second telop display 115IW20 is erased based on detection of a specific operation during display of second telop display 115IW20.

In addition, although the second telop display 115IW20 is described as displaying characters on an opaque background, the background may be transparent.

The display example shown in FIG. 8-3 is realized by the effect control CPU 120 performing an image blurring effect in which a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 are collectively vibrated in step S172.

For example, in Super Reach, the image blur effect is executed from the state where the first telop display 115IW10 and the second telop display 115IW20 are displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 8-3 (1)) (see FIG. 8-3 (1)). See 8-3 (2)). Specifically, a plurality of displays such as character images and first telop display 115IW10 are reduced at a common reduction ratio. Then, by executing the reduction effect, a black outside display area area 115IW30 is formed around the changed display. At this time, the second telop display 115IW20 remains unchanged from the position shown in FIG. , characters of the second telop display 115IW20 can be recognized.

Further, the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 are continuously displayed in a moving manner even while the image blur effect is being performed. During execution of the image blurring effect, the mode of the first telop display 115IW10 may change (for example, change from the first stage to the second stage) according to the degree of development of the super ready-to-win effect, or may be reduced. Therefore, the first telop display 115IW10 may not change even if the super ready-to-win effect develops during execution of the image blurring effect.

Note that the image blur effect is not a effect that is performed with all variations, and for example, the variation that executes the image blur effect has a higher expectation for a big hit than the variation that does not execute the image blur effect ( That is, an image blur effect is executed as a chance-up effect). Specifically, in the case of the big hit variation, the image blur effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case of the losing variation.

In the display example shown in FIG. 8-4 (1), the game ball to the right area of the game board 2 based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives a command indicating that it is in a specific game state in step S75 This is realized by displaying a right hitting display 115IW40 prompting the player to hit the ball (so-called right hitting).

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (1), by developing into super reach in a specific gaming state, the first telop display 115IW10 is displayed in an area partially overlapping the display area of the right-handed display 115IW40. Is displayed. At this time, the display priority of the right-handed display 115IW40 is higher than the display priority of the first telop display 115IW10. The player can recognize the content of the suggestion.

In the display example shown in FIG. 8-4(2), in a gaming machine having an operable movable body 115IW50, the effect control CPU 120 performs a role effect of driving the movable body 115IW50 to the advanced position in step S172. It is realized by

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(2), the display area of the movable body 115IW50 and the first telop display 115IW10 overlaps due to the performance of the character during super reach. At this time, the movable body 115IW50 is closer to the player (player's side) than the first telop display 115IW10. It is recognizable by the player.

In the display example shown in FIG. This is realized by performing a variable effect corresponding to the reach variation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(3), the first telop display 115IW10 straddles the image display device 9 and the sub-image display device 115IW60 provided adjacent to the right side of the image display device 9. It is now displayed. The sub-image display device 115IW60 is composed of, for example, an LCD, organic EL, etc., and displays various effect images. The secondary image display device 115IW60 may consist of a projector and a screen.

Note that the sub-image display device 115IW60 may be configured to be operable. For example, the display is normally performed at a retracted position that is not in contact with the image display device 9, and a predetermined condition is established (eg, selection of a specific variation pattern, detection of a player's action). Based on this, the first telop display 115IW10 displayed on the image display device 5 may be extended and displayed.

As described above, according to the characteristic portion 115IW, the gaming machine capable of executing a game is in a predetermined state (in this example, a state in which a predetermined effect (super ready-to-win effect) is being executed, an error Detecting state.Predetermined game state (low probability low base state (normal state), low probability high base state (time saving state), high probability low base state (latent state), high probability high base state (variable state )), or may be in a state of being controlled to a specific production mode), a state of detecting an error, a state of being controlled to a specific production mode) can be controlled (in this example, The effect control CPU 120 controls the super ready-to-win effect by executing step S172.In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 detects an error.In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to a predetermined game state, the effect control CPU 120 may control to a predetermined effect mode, or execute a predetermined effect), special effect (in this example, super reach effect) can be executed. Yes (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a super reach effect by performing step S172), and display means (in this example, an image Display device 5) (In this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first telop effect by performing step S172, and when a command indicating that an error is detected in step S75 is received, the first telop effect is displayed. 2 Perform telop production).

In this characteristic part 115IW, it is possible to execute a super ready-to-win effect as a special effect, but it is not limited to this. A pre-reading forewarning effect with fluctuation as a forewarning target may be executable as a special effect.

In addition, the "related display related to the predetermined state" means a display related to being currently controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a display such as "SP reachable" or "error occurring"), and a display related to a predetermined state in the future. It is a concept including display related to the possibility of being controlled by the state (for example, display such as "preparing" suggesting that a specific performance is scheduled to be executed).

Further, as described above, during the execution of the special effect, it is possible to display the related display in a predetermined manner (in this example, the first stage in which the characters move at a medium speed). Depending on the change in mode, the related display mode is changed from a predetermined mode to a special mode (in this example, the second stage where characters move at high speed and the third stage where characters move at low speed) linked with the mode of special effects. (In this example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S172 to display the first telop at the first stage in the first half of the super reach effect (before performing the cut-in display). 115IW10 is performed, the first telop display 115IW10 is performed in the second stage in the latter half of the super ready-to-win effect (after the cut-in display), and the first telop display 115IW10 is performed in the third stage immediately before the fluctuation stop (Fig. See 8-1)). As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, as described above, during the execution of the special effect, it is possible to display the related display in a predetermined manner (in this example, the first stage in which the characters move at a medium speed). According to the change of the mode, the related display mode is changed from a predetermined mode to a special mode with an operation speed different from the predetermined mode (in this example, the second stage where the characters move at high speed and the third stage where the characters move at low speed). (In this example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S172 to change the first telop in the first stage in the first half of the super reach effect (before performing cut-in display). Display 115IW10 is performed, first telop display 115IW10 is performed in the second stage in the second half of the super ready-to-win effect (after cut-in display), and first telop display 115IW10 is performed in the third stage immediately before the fluctuation stop ( See FIG. 8-1)). According to such a configuration, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 115IW, the first telop display 115IW10 is displayed in the first stage in the first half of the super reach effect, in the second stage in the second half of the super reach effect, and in the third stage immediately before the fluctuation stop (medium speed → switching from high speed to low speed), but the present invention is not limited to this as long as it changes according to changes in the mode of presentation. For example, it may be switched from low speed→medium speed→high speed or from high speed→medium speed→low speed.

Also, the mode of the first telop display 115IW10 may be switched only once, or may be switched three times or more. Also, the stages of the mode of the first telop display 115IW10 may be switched to the same stage multiple times, such as middle speed → high speed → low speed → high speed.

In addition, it was decided that the characters move at a constant speed (medium speed for the first stage, high speed for the second stage, and low speed for the third stage). For example, a stage may be provided in which the movement speed of the characters is increased or decreased at predetermined intervals.

Further, the special mode having an operating speed different from that of the predetermined mode is a concept that includes a mode with a higher speed and a mode with a lower speed than the predetermined mode. In addition, the low-speed mode is a concept that includes not only those that are displayed more slowly than the medium-speed mode and the high-speed mode, but also those that are fixedly displayed (stopped) and those that are substantially stopped. For example, by switching from the stage where the characters in the telop display are displayed to moving to the stage where the characters are fixed and displayed, or from the stage where the characters are fixed in the telop display to the stage where the characters are moved , the mode may be changed.

In this characterizing portion 115IW, the telop display in which the characters are moved is displayed as a mode that accompanies the operation, but the specific example of the operation is not limited to this. For example, the characters do not move, but the effect images surrounding the characters are displayed in a moving manner, the characters or effect images blink, or the size, brightness, color, or transparency of the characters or effect images changes. There may be. Also, the color and transparency of the background portion of the characters may be changed.

In addition, the "special mode linked with the mode of special effect" is a mode linked with the progress of special effect like this characteristic part 115IW (for example, if it is the first half of reach, it is the first stage, 2nd stage if it is just before the fluctuation stops) and a mode linked to the magnitude of the effect of the special performance (for example, a mode that changes according to the switching frequency of the display image or the tempo of the song). It is a concept.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8-1, at the end of the super reach effect (see FIG. 8-1 (5)), the letters of the first telop display 115IW10 sway according to the impact of the sword and ax colliding. Alternatively, the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 may move in a direction different from the movement direction, thereby displaying the first telop display 115IW10 in a manner linked to the content of the effect.

In addition, at that time, a plurality of types of impact magnitudes (for example, impact (large) and impact (small)) are provided for the sword and ax to collide with each other, and the first telop display 115IW10 may be different in the magnitude of the influence (for example, the amplitude of character fluctuation).

Further, even with the same kind of impact, the magnitude of the influence (for example, the width of the character fluctuation) that the first telop display 115IW10 receives may differ depending on whether the hit is a big hit or not. This makes it possible to draw more attention to the first telop display 115IW10 and improve interest.

Moreover, even if the impact is the same, the first telop display displayed at the lower left of the image display device 5 and the first telop display displayed at the upper right of the image display device 5 are more affected by the impact. It is also possible that the width (for example, the amplitude of character fluctuation) is different. For example, in a game machine that displays a large telop display with large characters and a small telop display with small characters in parallel, such as the characteristic portion 115IW, an effect is performed in which a sword and an ax collide with each other with a predetermined impact. In this case, if the characters swayed by the same width between the large telop display and the small telop display, the ratio of the sway width to the small telop display character size should be higher than the ratio of the sway width to the large telop display character size. is large, the influence on the small telop display appears to be relatively greater than the influence on the large telop display, which may give an uncomfortable feeling. Therefore, when the sword and the ax collide with each other due to a predetermined impact, the width of shaking the characters of the large telop display is larger than the width of the shaking of the characters of the small telop display (for example, the large telop If the ratio of the small telop display character size to the display character size and the small telop display character sway width ratio to the large telop display character sway width are the same configuration), the large telop display Since the influence on the display and the influence on the display of the small telop appear to be relatively equal, it is possible to prevent a feeling of strangeness.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 115IW, as a related display, a first related display that changes from a predetermined mode to a special mode according to a change in the mode of the special effect (in this example, display of characters according to the progress of the super reach effect) A first telop display 115IW10) in which the speed level changes, and a second related display in which the mode does not change according to changes in the mode of the special effect (in this example, the mode is constant regardless of the progress of the super ready-to-win effect). Second telop display 115IW20) can be displayed (see FIG. 8-2). As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 115IW, the characters of the second telop display 115IW20 are displayed without movement, but the present invention is not limited to this, and display with movement (moving and displaying characters and effect images, characters or effect images that blink, or that change in size, brightness, color, or transparency). Even in that case, the second telop display 115IW20 may be displayed in a fixed manner without being affected by changes in the development manner of the super ready-to-win effect.

Further, in this characteristic portion 115IW, a first related display related to the effect state (in this example, a first telop display 115IW10 indicating that the super ready-to-win effect is being executed) and a second related display related to the game state. (In this example, a second telop display 115IW20 indicating that an error is being detected) can be displayed (see FIG. 8-2). As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

The "first related display related to the production state" is a display indicating that a predetermined production (super reach production) is being executed, and a display showing that control is being performed in a specific production mode. It may also be a display prompting an operation to be performed.

"Second related display related to the game state" is a display indicating that an error is occurring, as well as a predetermined game state (low probability low base state (normal state), low probability high base state (time saving state ), high-probability low-base state (latent state), high-probability high-base state (probability variable state)), display to prompt the player how to hit (for example, right-handed notification display), etc. There may be.

Further, in this characteristic portion 115IW, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (in this example, an image blurring effect in which a plurality of displays are collectively vibrated) (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step S172 to execute an image blurring effect). blur effect), and in response to the execution of a predetermined effect, it is possible to cause the display means to appear an area outside the display area (in this example, an area outside the display area 115IW30), so that the area straddles the area outside the display area. When the second related display is displayed so as to straddle the area outside the display area, the display content of the second related display can be recognized (in this example, the area outside the display area It is assumed that the second telop display 115IW20 can be displayed across 115IW30, and the characters in the second telop display 115IW20 can be recognized (see FIG. 8-3). As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 115IW, by displaying the characters "Error Occurring" at a position that does not overlap with the area outside the display area 115IW30, even if an image blurring effect is performed, the second telop display 115IW20 Although it is configured to be able to recognize characters, it is not limited to this.

For example, when the characters "Error Occurring" are displayed in a position overlapping the display area outside area 115IW30 when an image blur effect is performed, the characters "Error Occurring" do not merge with the outside display area area 115IW30. (For example, if the display area outside the area 115IW30 is black, the characters "error occurring" are displayed in white), By displaying an opaque background (within the frame of the second telop display 115IW20) like the characteristic part 115IW behind the "error occurring", the characters in the second telop display 115IW20 can be recognized. may be configured.

In addition, when the out-of-display-area area 115IW30 is made to appear, if some characters of the telop display become difficult to recognize because they are assimilated into the out-of-display-area area 115IW30, the characters in the telop-display are moved to the out-of-display-area area. All characters in the display area outside area 115IW30 may be made recognizable by moving to a position where they are not assimilated to 115IW30.

Further, in this characteristic portion 115IW, the display means can display a related display and a specific display (in this example, a right-handed information display 115IW40 that prompts right-handed players in a specific game state) (in this example, the effect The control CPU 120 displays the right-handed notification display 115IW40 based on the reception of the command indicating the specific game state in step S75), and also when displaying the specific display superimposed on the related display, The content of the related display becomes recognizable (in this example, even when the right-handed notification display 115IW40 is displayed superimposed on the first telop display 115IW10, the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 can be recognized (Fig. 8 See -4 (1))). Thereby, the related display can be displayed more preferably.

Even if the specific display is displayed, the characters are not limited to moving as long as the contents of the first telop display 115IW10 can be recognized.

For example, by displaying a plurality of the same character information "SP reachable!" However, the contents of the first telop display 115IW10 may be recognized from a plurality of pieces of the same character information.

In addition, when the first telop display 115IW10 and the right-hand hitting notification display 115IW40 are displayed in an overlapping manner, the effect control CPU 120 increases the volume of the SP reach-in-progress music more than the volume of the right-hand hitting instruction voice. It is also possible to make it easier to audibly recognize the music during reach, and to make it possible to recognize the content of the first telop display 115IW10.

Further, the specific display that is overlapped with the first telop display 115IW10 is not limited to the right hitting notification display 115IW40. For example, even if another telop display (hereinafter referred to as "third telop display") is displayed overlapping the first telop display 115IW10 as a specific display, the content of the first telop display 115IW10 can be recognized in the same manner. It is also possible to

Also, in the case where the third telop display is overlapped with the first telop display 115IW10 as a specific display, the first telop display 115IW10 may differ in appearance according to the content suggested by the third telop display.

For example, when the contents suggested by the third telop display 115IW10 attract less attention than the contents suggested by the first telop display 115IW10, the character movement speed of the first telop display 115IW10 is higher than that of the third telop display. On the other hand, when the contents suggested by the first telop display 115IW10 attract less attention than the contents suggested by the third telop display, the moving speed of the characters of the third telop display is faster than that of the first telop display 115IW10. can be fast.

Further, for example, when the first telop display 115IW10 and the third telop display suggest the same content (for example, the first telop display 115IW10 suggests that the pre-reading preview effect is being executed, and the third telop display When the content of the pre-reading preview effect is suggested), the moving speed of the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 and the character of the third telop display may be approximately the same.

In addition, when the first telop display 115IW10 is displayed but the specific display is not displayed, when the specific display is displayed superimposed on the first telop display 115IW10, the specific display makes it difficult to recognize. By displaying the content of the first telop display 115IW10 that has been changed to a position that is not hidden by the specific display (for example, displaying a new telop in another position or displaying a balloon), the first telop display 115IW10 may be made recognizable.

Further, the characteristic portion 115IW includes a movable body (in this example, the movable body 115IW50), the display means can display a related display in a predetermined display area, and the movable body is at least a predetermined display. It is possible to move to an operating position that overlaps with the area, and even when the movable body is at the operating position while the related display is being displayed, the contents of the related display can be recognized (in this example, the first telop display 115IW10 is displayed). It is assumed that characters of the first telop display 115IW10 can be recognized even when the movable body 115IW50 is moved to a position overlapping the area (see FIG. 8-4(2)). Thereby, the related display can be displayed more preferably.

It should be noted that the characters are not limited to those in which the characters move as long as the content of the first telop display 115IW10 can be recognized even if the movable body advances.

For example, by displaying a plurality of the same character information "SP reachable!" However, the contents of the first telop display 115IW10 may be recognized from a plurality of pieces of the same character information.

In addition, when the display area of the first telop display 115IW10 and the position of the movable body 115IW50 overlap, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the volume of the sound corresponding to the operation of the movable body 115IW50 is higher than the SP reach. The volume of the music may be increased to make it easier to audibly recognize the music during SP reach, thereby making it possible to recognize the content of the first telop display 115IW10.

In addition, it is possible to display a telop display A that can be difficult to see due to the movement of the movable body 115IW50 and a telop display B that is not difficult to view due to the movement of the movable body 115IW50. Even if it is unrecognizable, since the movable body 115IW50 does not overlap the telop display B, the content of the telop display B may be recognizable. It should be noted that the suggestive contents of the telop display A and the telop display B may be the same, or may be different.

Also, when the first telop display 115IW10 is displayed but the movable body 115IW50 is positioned at the retracted position (the state where the first telop display 115IW10 is visible), the movable body 115IW50 moves to the advanced position. , the content of the first telop display 115IW10 that has become difficult to recognize due to the movable body 115IW50 is displayed at a position not hidden by the movable body 115IW50 (for example, a new telop display or a balloon display is performed at a different position). ), the contents of the first telop display 115IW10 may be made recognizable.

Further, the present characteristic portion 115IW includes, as display means, first display means (the image display device 5 in this example) and second display means (sub-image display device 115IW60 in this example), and the first display means and the second display means (in this example, the first telop display 115IW10 can be displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60 (Fig. 8-4 See (3))). Thereby, the related display can be displayed more preferably.

As the second display means, a dot-matrix LED display device (a dot-matrix display in which LEDs are arranged in a two-dimensional array) or a Versalighter (a plurality of LEDs arranged on the longitudinal side of a plate are shortened according to a specific pattern). A display device that displays various effects images by using afterimages of LED light generated by rotating the plate while blinking periodically may be provided.

Also, when the related display is displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60, a non-display area (for example, By making it possible to display characters larger than the size of the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60, it is possible to prevent the related display characters from becoming difficult or unrecognizable due to the non-display area. good too.

Also, when the telop display is displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60, the telop display characters are displayed only on one of the display devices (the display area for the telop display is the same as that of the image display device 5). Although it is provided across the sub-image display device 115IW60, the character information of the telop display may be displayed only on one of the display devices.

In addition, a telop display A that displays characters across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60, and a telop display B that displays characters without straddling the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60. The size of characters displayed in telop display A and telop display B may be different. For example, the size of the telop display characters displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60 is larger than the size of the telop display characters displayed on only one of the display devices. By doing so, it is possible to prevent an unsightly appearance as a whole.

Further, the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60 are not limited to being horizontally adjacent to each other, but may be vertically adjacent to each other.

Further, the characteristic part 115IW executes a specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an image blurring effect by performing step S172). ), the display means provides, as related displays, a first specific related display (first telop display 115IW10 in this example) that is changed by the specific effect and a second specific related display that is not changed by the specific effect (in this example , second telop display 115IW20) can be displayed (see FIG. 8-3 (2)). Thereby, the related display can be displayed more preferably.

In addition, as a specific effect that gives a common change to multiple displays, it is not limited to an image blurring effect that vibrates multiple displays at once. The enlargement effect to be displayed may be executed, and the first telop display 115IW10 may be changed by the reduction effect or the enlargement effect, while the second telop display 115IW20 may not be changed by the reduction effect or the enlargement effect.

Further, the characteristic part 115IW executes a specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an image blurring effect by performing step S172). ), the display means can display the related display in a manner that accompanies an action, and can display the related display in a manner that accompanies the action even when changed due to execution of the specific effect (in this example, , the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 are moved and displayed (see FIG. 8-3 (2))) even when the image blur effect is performed. Thereby, the related display can be displayed more preferably.

In addition, the characters displayed in the telop display are not limited to those that move linearly, and those that move and display within an annular area, those that move and display within an area formed in a zigzag pattern, and those that move and display are displayed. , a horizontally extending area (strictly speaking, an area drawn on a plane that appears to extend horizontally (that is, on the display screen of the image display device 5)) is displayed so as to appear stereoscopically. may

(Description of Characteristic Portion 31AK and Characteristic Portion 115IW)
A gaming machine may include both the characteristic portion 31AK and the characteristic portion 115IW described above. For example, the title display in the characteristic portion 31AK is displayed as the related display in the characteristic portion 115IW (the mode of the title display of the ready-to-win effect is changed from the first stage to the second stage according to the change in the mode of the ready-to-win effect). may be

Further, for example, the title display of the first suggestive effect (for example, super reach A and super reach B) in the characteristic portion 31AK is set as the first related display in the feature portion 115IW, and the second suggestive effect (for example, super reach D and Super reach E) title display may be the second related display in the characteristic portion 115IW (specifically, the mode of title display of the first suggestive effect (for example, super reach A or super reach B) may be super reach A or super reach It changes according to the change of the mode of B, and the mode of the title display of the second suggestion effect (for example, super reach D and super reach E) does not change according to the change of the mode of super reach D and super reach E).

Further, for example, the expectation suggestive display in the characteristic portion 31AK may be displayed as a related display in the characteristic portion 115IW.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 38SH and Characteristic Portion 115IW)
A gaming machine may include both the characteristic portion 38SH and the characteristic portion 115IW described above. Here, the characteristic portion 38SH includes the characteristic portion 38SH (39SH), the characteristic portion 38SH (40SH), the characteristic portion 38SH (41SH), and the characteristic portion 38SH (42SH). For example, the related display in the characteristic portion 38SH and the related display in the characteristic portion 115IW may be the same.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 005SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 005SG will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 provided in the characteristic portion 005SG has a first origin position above the front side of the image display device 5 and a first origin position below the first origin position and in front of the display area 5E of the image display device 5. A first movable body 005SG301 that can move in the vertical direction between the advanced position, a second origin position that is below the front side of the image display device 5, and a display area 5E of the image display device 5 that is directly above the second origin position. and a second movable body 005SG401 that can move vertically between second advanced positions that are forward, and a stereoscopic image can be displayed on the image display device 5. These first movable bodies 005SG301 , and the second movable body 005SG401, and an effect by displaying a stereoscopic image on the image display device 5 can be executed.

The first movable body 005SG301 of the characteristic part 005SG has a first movable part 005SG301A provided slidably with respect to a base part (not shown) provided on the first movable body 005SG301, and a first movable part 005SG301A. and a second movable portion 005SG301B provided to be slidable relative to.

FIG. 9-1 is a diagram showing the configuration of an image display device, the display state of the image display device, and the viewing state of a stereoscopic image with both eyes of a player. The image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 005SG is capable of displaying 2D images and also capable of displaying 3D images. Next, a configuration for displaying a stereoscopically viewable 3D image in the image display device 5 will be briefly described.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, the image display device 5 includes an image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 for displaying a 3D image, which is a stereoscopic image (video) as an image that can be viewed stereoscopically. It has a backlight 005SG901 that emits planar light toward the front side, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 provided on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 with a predetermined gap from the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900. , and an image display device comprising a parallax barrier type autostereoscopic liquid crystal display device. The image display device 5 performs variable display of decorative symbols during the variable display period of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B.

The parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 is a shutter that prevents the player's left eye from viewing the right-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 in the form of a vertically long strip, and prevents the player's right eye from viewing the left-eye image. A parallax barrier that displays a parallax barrier image having a vertically striped black portion and a transparent portion that enables the image for the right eye to be viewed by the right eye of the player and the image for the left eye to be viewed by the left eye of the player. The liquid crystal panel has relatively high optical transparency and is capable of an image display state and a transmissive display state in which all pixels are transparent and have no vertical striped black portions.

In other words, the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 of the characteristic portion 005SG is a parallax barrier including a parallax barrier for preventing the player's left eye from viewing the right-eye image and preventing the player's right eye from viewing the left-eye image. Display and fully transmissive display in which the parallax barrier is not displayed are possible.

In this characterizing portion 005SG, an example in which the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device as the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 will be described. Cathode Ray Tube), FED (Field Emission Display), PDP (Plasma Display Panel), dot matrix LED, organic or inorganic electroluminescence (EL) panel, or other image display type display device.

Further, the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 is fixedly provided at a position on the rear side of the game board 2 and in front of the player so as to overlap the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900.

The effect control CPU 120 stores two-dimensional (2D) image data and stereoscopic (3D) image data for displaying a stereoscopic image consisting of a right-eye image and a left-eye image according to the received effect control command. 123) outputs a command for reading necessary data to the VDP (display control unit 123).

In FIG. 9-1, the liquid crystal panel for image 005SG900 is provided with a vertical belt-shaped predetermined width that forms a stereoscopic image read from the image data ROM based on the instruction from the effect control CPU 120 by the VDP. A right-eye image (R) and a left-eye image (L) are alternately displayed. In this characteristic portion 005SG, the display widths of the image for the right eye (R) and the image for the left eye (L) are made uniform, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these display widths are set to the central portion of the screen. and ends may be different.

For example, when the player's viewpoint position is at the reference position X0, D0, an image corresponding to X0, D0 is displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 as shown in FIG. , for the right eye, each left-eye image (L) displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 is hidden and blocked by a black belt portion (shutter; also referred to as a non-transmissive portion), and each right-eye image ( R) is viewed through the non-black belt portion (blank; also referred to as a transparent portion), so that only the right-eye image (R) is provided to the right eye, while the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 is provided to the left eye. Each right-eye image (R) displayed in the is hidden and blocked by a black belt portion (shutter; also referred to as a non-transmissive portion), and each left-eye image (L) is displayed as a non-black belt portion (blank; The left eye is provided with only the image for the left eye (L) by being viewed through the transparent portion), so that the player can view the image with the naked eye without wearing polarized glasses or the like. Stereoscopic images can be viewed.

In FIG. 9-1, in order to facilitate understanding, the distance between the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 and the player's eyes is compared with the distance between the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 and the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910. , For convenience of illustration, it is shown to be much smaller than the actual length, so the intersection position where the line segments indicating the line of sight of the right eye and left eye intersect moves to the front side or the rear side of the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910. However, the actual amount of movement of these intersecting positions is very small.

In this characteristic portion 005SG, stereoscopic vision is performed in which depth is sensed by utilizing binocular parallax in the viewing direction of images seen by the right and left eyes. When the player views the 3D image displayed on the image display device 5 with both eyes, the direction of the line of sight when viewing an arbitrary part of the 3D image with the right eye and the left eye differs, and the difference in the direction of the line of sight ( The amount of parallax can be used to perceive depth. A position where the line-of-sight directions intersect is called a convergence position, and an angle formed by the line-of-sight directions at this convergence position is called a convergence angle. If the angle of convergence is large, the player perceives the 3D image as if it is close to him, and if the angle of convergence is small, the player perceives the 3D image as if it is far from him. there is

In this characteristic portion 005SG, a 3D image (see FIGS. 9-3 (A) and (B)) displayed on the image display device 5 in the first movable body effect as described later is displayed from the image display surface of the image display device 5. The convergence position is set so that it appears to protrude toward the front side (the side closer to the player), but the convergence position A, where the apparent protrusion of the 3D image is small, and the apparent protrusion of the effect image It is possible to set a large convergence position B, a distance corresponding to the rear part of the first movable body 005SG301, and a part that seems to have a 3D image in the convergence distance A far from the player, and the first movable body 005SG301 A distance corresponding to the front part and a part where the 3D image appears to be at the convergence distance B close to the player may be realized.

As a result, in the first movable portion 005SG301A tilted forward at the close position, the apparent degree of protrusion of the 3D image differs between the rear portion near the display area 5E and the front portion farther from the display area 5E, thereby producing a more three-dimensional effect. can be done. In addition to the above-mentioned congestion positions A and B, it may be possible to execute an effect in which a plurality of congestion positions are set.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 005SG, an effect image 005SG004 (see FIG. 9-3 (A)) corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 (see FIG. 9-3 (A)) corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 described later at the convergence position B and a fragment image 005SG006 (FIG. 9) not corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 -3 (B)) is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, only a part of the effect image is set to the convergence position B, and the other parts are away from the convergence position B You can set the position. For example, in the effect image, only the portion near the periphery of the first movable body 005SG301 is set to the convergence position B, and the convergence position is set so that it appears to approach the player side as it moves away from the first movable body 005SG301. can be

Further, in the present characteristic portion 005SG, the convergence position is set so that the 3D image displayed on the image display device 5 can be seen to protrude toward the front side (the side closer to the player) than the image display surface of the image display device 5. Although it is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the convergence position is set so that the effect image is arranged on the back side (far side from the player) from the display surface of the image display device 5. May be set.

Further, in this characteristic portion 005SG, the effect image 005SG004 (see FIG. 9-3 (A)) displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in a state set to the convergence position B, and the convergence position B is the first movable By performing control so that the body 005SG301 is within a predetermined range in the front-rear direction, the first movable body 005SG301 at the close position and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 can be seen to be integrally linked. Therefore, it is possible to perform a powerful production.

In addition, when the first movable body 005SG301 is positioned at a distant proximity position on the front side of the image display device 5, it is hidden by the first movable body 005SG301 in the display area 5E of the image display device 5, and the player cannot see through the eyes. Invisible areas occur, and areas that the player can see with one eye but cannot see with the other eye. When a 3D image is displayed in such a region that can only be viewed with one eye, not only is the 3D image not stereoscopically viewable, but the 3D image may appear unclear and blurred. Therefore, in the display area 5E in the vicinity of the periphery of the first movable body 005SG301, which is an area visible only with one eye, the 3D image is not displayed (or replaced with a 2D image and displayed). A 3D image may be displayed only in a remote display area that can be visually recognized by the player with both eyes. In particular, when the 3D image is a moving image and the 3D image moves together with the first movable body 005SG301, it is effective to display the 3D image only in the display area visible to the player with both eyes.

In addition, in this characteristic part 005SG, a form in which a 3D image can be displayed in the first movable body effect described later is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second movable body effect and other effects ( For example, a 3D image may be displayed in a notice effect, a big win effect, etc., or a decorative pattern may be displayed in a 3D image.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 005SG, a stereoscopic image is displayed by an image display device composed of a parallax barrier type autostereoscopic liquid crystal display device, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lenticular lens method is used. Alternatively, a stereoscopic image may be displayed using an integral imaging type autostereoscopic liquid crystal display device. Further, the stereoscopic vision is not limited to the stereoscopic vision with the naked eye, and the stereoscopic vision may be performed by wearing polarizing glasses or the like.

In addition, in this characteristic part 005SG, regardless of whether the first movable body 005SG301 operates or not, at a predetermined timing in the development effect of the first movable body effect described later, a 3D image corresponding to the first movable part 005SG301A is displayed. Although an effect image 005SG004 and a cutting edge image 005SG002 and an effect image 005SG003, which are 2D images corresponding to a certain effect image 005SG004 and the second movable part 005SG301B, are displayed as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable body 005SG301 does not operate for some reason, the cutting edge image 005SG002, the effect image 005SG003, the effect image 005SG004, etc. may not be displayed.

Further, at a predetermined timing in the development effect, the effect image may be displayed together with an image imitating the first movable body 005SG301 as an image corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301. Furthermore, an image corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 (an image imitating the first movable body 005SG301, an effect image, etc.) is always displayed as the first movable body 005SG301 even when the first movable body 005SG301 is operating normally. It may be displayed in an area corresponding to the back side of the body 005SG301. By doing so, even if the first movable body 005SG301 does not operate for some reason, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, so it is possible to avoid stopping the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1A.

(Example of the effect operation of the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect)
Next, an example of the effect operation of the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect will be described with reference to FIG. 9-2. 9-2, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the rendering operation of the movable body rendering. 9-3, (A) and (B) are diagrams showing details of an example of the effect operation of the first movable body effect, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of image display.

First, if the variation pattern corresponds to super reach, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. Then, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the variable display, the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R are stopped to display the same decorative pattern, and the central decorative pattern display area 5C is continued to be variablely displayed to reach. A normal reach effect is executed as a mode. Next, as shown in FIG. 9-2(C), after temporarily stopping and displaying the lost symbols in the center decorative design display area 5C, as shown in FIG. 9-2(D), the variable display is started again. By doing so, the super reach production is started. After the execution of the super ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIG. 9-2(E), the lost symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the center decoration symbol display area 5C.

When the execution of the first movable body effect is determined as the development effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. After moving to the intermediate position between the first origin position and the first advanced position, the first proximity position is behind the first advanced position from the intermediate position and close to the display area 5E of the image display device 5. In accordance with the movement up to, the second movable part 005SG301B is moved with respect to the first movable body 005SG301A, and a cutting edge image and an effect image imitating the second movable part 005SG301B are displayed in the display area 5E of the image display device 5. A first movable body effect is executed. At this time, the first movable body 005SG301 changes (deforms) from a normal mode in which the second movable part 005SG301B protrudes so as to be visible to the player, to a retracted mode in which the first movable body 005SG301 is accommodated.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-3(A), the effect control CPU 120 moves the first movable body 005SG301 from the intermediate position to the close position in the first movable body effect, while moving the first movable body 005SG301 from the normal mode to the contracted mode. , the first movable body 005SG301 moves downward and rearward so as to approach the central decorative design display area 5C, which is approximately the central position of the display area E at the rear, from the intermediate position at the front.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 slightly enlarges and displays the pattern image 005SG001 of the decorative pattern (symbol of "6") displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C in accordance with the above operation, and A cutting edge image 005SG002 imitating 005SG301B is superimposed on the pattern image 005SG001 so as to be seen through and displayed. Thus, in the first movable body effect, the first movable part 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 is moved toward the symbol image 005SG001 displayed in the display area 5E, and the contraction mode is displayed on the image display device 5. The cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable part 005SG301B, which can be recognized in the normal mode before being transformed into a shape, is displayed in the part where the second movable part 005SG301B is positioned when it is in the normal mode in the display area 5E. By superimposing and displaying the pattern image 005SG001 so that it can be seen to be connected to the lower part of the display area 5E, it is possible to make the second movable part 005SG301B appear three-dimensionally as if it were located on the far side through the display area 5E. This makes it possible to recognize a single object, a sword. That is, one object (first movable body 005SG301) in the normal state before being deformed in the contracted state can be recognized from the first movable part 005SG301A that is the object and the cutting edge image 005SG002 that is the display image.

In addition, the first movable body 005SG301 is tilted forward at the close position, and the cutting edge image 005SG002 is tapered rearward so that it can be seen when the second movable part 005SG301B is at the projecting position. As a result, the cutting edge pierces a position corresponding to the boundary between the first movable portion 005SG301A and the second movable portion 005SG301B in the design image 005SG001, as if the second movable portion 005SG301B penetrates the display area 5E and is located on the far side. It can be shown three-dimensionally.

Further, an effect image 005SG003 for highlighting the cutting edge image 005SG002 is displayed around the cutting edge image 005SG002 in the display area 5E, and the first movable part 005SG301A is displayed around the first movable part 005SG301A in the display area 5E. Effect image 005SG004 for highlighting is displayed. These effect images 005SG003 and 005SG004 are images of the same kind imitating flames, although the modes are different, and are displayed at positions corresponding to the periphery of the first movable part 005SG301A and the cutting edge image 005SG002 so as to surround them. , the first movable portion 005SG301A and the cutting edge image 005SG002 make it possible to recognize one object more strongly.

Further, by displaying the crack image 005SG005 on the pattern image 005SG001, it is possible to make it look as if the design image 005SG001 is about to be destroyed by the cutting edge sticking into the pattern image 005SG001. Furthermore, after the crack image 005SG005 is gradually enlarged and displayed, as shown in FIG. Display an image that appears to be scattered around. Further, by displaying the effect image 005SG007 emphasizing that the decoration pattern has been destroyed, it is possible to strongly recognize that the decoration pattern is destroyed and the variable display is resumed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays some of the images (the effect image 005SG004 and the fragment image 005SG006 for highlighting the first movable part 005SG301A) as stereoscopic 3D images, Other images (pattern image 005SG001, cutting edge image 005SG002, effect image 005SG003, crack image 005SG005) can be controlled to be displayed as 2D images.

By doing so, the effect image 005SG004 and the fragment image 005SG006, which are desired to appear closer to the viewer than the display area 5E, can be rendered with a three-dimensional effect. In particular, the effect image 005SG004 is placed in the vicinity of the first movable part 005SG301A, which is actually closer to the front than the display area 5E, that is, in a position away from the display area 5E to the front like the first movable part 005SG301A. It can appear as if image 005SG004 is being displayed.

On the other hand, the other pattern image 005SG001, the blade edge image 005SG002, the effect image 005SG003, and the crack image 005SG005 are displayed as 2D images, so that the pattern image 005SG001, the effect image 005SG003, and the crack image 005SG005 are positioned in the display area 5E, and the blade edge is displayed. Since the image 005SG002 can be made to appear to be located on the far side of the display area 5E, a sense of depth can be created.

9-3(C), the effect image 005SG004 corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 is a 3D image, and the effect image 005SG003 corresponding to the cutting edge image 005SG002 is a 2D image. Although the display control based on the display pattern A (display pattern A shown in FIG. 9-3(C)) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and like the display pattern B, the first movable body Both the effect image 005SG004 corresponding to 005SG301 and the effect image 005SG003 corresponding to the cutting edge image 005SG002 are displayed as 3D images, or the effect image 005SG004 corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 is displayed as a 2D image as in display pattern C. On the other hand, the effect image 005SG003 corresponding to the cutting edge image 005SG002 is displayed as a 3D image, or like the display pattern D, the effect image 005SG004 corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 and the effect image 005SG003 corresponding to the cutting edge image 005SG002 are displayed. Both may be displayed as 2D images.

These display patterns A to D may be determined at different ratios depending on whether the display result is a big hit or not. For example, display pattern A, display pattern B, display pattern C, display pattern It may be set so that the reliability increases in the order of D.

Returning to FIG. 9-2(E), when the missing design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the central decorative design display area 5C, if the second movable body performance of the performance pattern B is determined as the development performance type, As shown in FIG. 9-2(H), the first movable body 005SG301 is moved from the first origin position to the first advanced position, and the second movable body 005SG401 is moved from the second origin position to the second advanced position. At the same time, a second movable body effect is executed to display an effect image in the display area 5E of the image display device 5.

Although not shown in detail, after executing the first movable body effect or the second movable body effect, the reach effect of super reach (weak super reach with low expectation of big hit or strong super reach with high expectation of big hit In the case of a big hit, the big win performance is executed in response to the start of the big win game state after stopping and displaying the combinations of the big win patterns. On the other hand, in the case of losing, the combination of losing symbols is stopped and displayed, and when the reserved memory is 1 or more, the next variable display is started.

In addition, in this characterizing section 005SG, a form in which the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect can be executed during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The ratio of control to the jackpot game state may differ between when the first movable body effect is executed and when the second movable body effect is executed. Also, in the case where the first movable body effect is executed during the variable display and the case where the second movable body effect is executed, the ratio of executing the weak super reach effect and the strong super reach effect after that during the variable display. The rate at which the ready-to-win effect is executed may be different.

As described above, the characteristic portion 005SG includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, in a game machine provided with an operable movable body, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-194091, the movable body provided above the display means is displayed on the display means. There are those that can execute a movable body effect that rotates so as to hit the area (act on the display area). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, since the movable body only moves toward the display area of the display means, there is a problem that the rendering effect of the movable body rendering is insufficient. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the rendering effect of the movable body rendering, the gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention comprises:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) capable of playing,
a display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5);
an operable movable body (for example, a first movable body 005SG301);
with
The movable body operates toward the display area of the display means, and a specific image corresponding to the movable body is displayed on the display means, whereby a movable body effect can be executed (for example, effect control CPU 120 However, in the first movable body effect, the first movable part 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 is moved toward the display area 5E, and the normal state before deformation into the contracted state can be recognized on the image display device 5. A portion that displays the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B (see FIG. 9-3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the first movable body 005SG301 moves from the front of the image display device 5 toward the display area 5E, the cutting edge image 005SG002 is displayed as the specific image corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301. The effect of the first movable body presentation can be enhanced.

Specifically, not only is the first movable body 005SG301 moved toward the display area 5E from the front to the rear, but also the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable part 005SG301B of the first movable body 005SG301 is displayed. , the second movable part 005SG301B, which is a part of the first movable body 005SG301, can be stereoscopically shown as if it is located on the far side of the display area 5E, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The movable body is transformable between a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode, and transforms from the first mode to the second mode when moving toward the display area of the display means. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first movable part 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 backward and downward so as to approach the display area 5E of the image display device 5, the second movable part 005SG301B is accommodated in the first movable part 005SG301A to change from the normal mode to the contracted mode),
In the movable body rendering, by displaying an image corresponding to the movable body in the first mode as the specific image on the display means, it is possible to recognize the state before deformation of the movable body (for example, an image for controlling rendering). In the first movable body presentation, the CPU 120 moves the first movable portion 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 toward the display area 5E, and the image display device 5 recognizes the normal state before deformation to the contracted state. The part that displays the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the possible second movable part 005SG301B (see Fig. 9-3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the normal state before deformation of the first movable body 005SG301 can be recognized in the first movable body presentation, the action and operation of the first movable body 005SG301 with respect to the display area 5E can be emphasized. The production effect of the movable body production can be further enhanced.

Specifically, by deforming the first movable body 005SG301 into the contracted mode, the first movable part 005SG301A can be brought closer to the display area 5E than when moving toward the display area 5E in the normal mode. The second movable part 005SG301B, which is a part of the first movable body 005SG301, can be stereoscopically shown as if it is located on the farther side of the display area 5E.

In addition, according to the actual operation of the first movable part 005SG301A, the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable part 005SG301B is displayed in association with the first movable part 005SG301A, whereby the first movable body, which is one object, is displayed. Since 005SG301 can be recognized, it is possible to realize a powerful first movable body effect.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
In the movable body production, the movable body operates toward the production display while the display means is displaying the production display (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs the first A portion that moves the first movable portion 005SG301A of the movable body 005SG301 toward the pattern image 005SG001 displayed in the display area 5E),
The display means can display an image that penetrates the effect display as the specific image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize the normal state before being deformed into the contracted state on the image display device 5). The cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable part 005SG301B is superimposed on the pattern image 005SG001 so as to be see-through, so that the second movable part 005SG301B can be displayed three-dimensionally as if it were located on the far side through the display area 5E. The part that can be shown to (see Figure 9-3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to realize an effect linked with the pattern image 005SG001 displayed on the image display device 5, thereby improving the interest.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The display means can display a special image that can be viewed stereoscopically,
In the movable body production, an image that emphasizes the movable body can be displayed as the special image (for example, the production control CPU 120 can display the effect image 005SG004 and the fragment image 005SG006 for emphasizing the first movable part 005SG301A. is a part that can be displayed as a stereoscopic 3D image (see Fig. 9-3 (A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying the effect image 005SG004 as a special image emphasizing the first movable body 005SG301, it is possible to achieve a three-dimensional presentation and improve interest. Specifically, since the effect image 005SG004 can appear to be displayed on the front side at a position corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 on the front side of the display area 5E, a more three-dimensional effect can be realized.

Further, in the present characteristic part 005SG, the form using the image display device 5 capable of displaying a 3D image was exemplified as an example of the display means, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only a 2D image is displayed. It may be a possible display means.

In addition, in the characteristic part 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301 is exemplified as being deformed from the normal mode to the contracted mode when moving from the intermediate position toward the close position, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the first movable body 005SG301 may be moved toward the close position while being deformed from the normal mode to the contracted mode at the intermediate position or the first origin position.

Further, the characteristic portion 005SG includes a second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a game machine provided with an operable movable body, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-194091, the movable body provided above the display means is displayed on the display means. There are those that can execute a movable body effect that rotates so as to hit the area (act on the display area). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, since the movable body only moves toward the display area of the display means, there is a problem that the rendering effect of the movable body rendering is insufficient. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the rendering effect of the movable body rendering, the gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention comprises:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) capable of playing,
a display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5);
an operable movable body (for example, a first movable body 005SG301);
with
The movable body moves toward the display area of the display means, and a special image that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed on the display means, so that a movable body effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 In the first movable body rendering, the first movable part 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 is moved toward the display area 5E, and an effect image 005SG004 for highlighting the first movable part 005SG301A on the image display device 5 is displayed. A part that can be displayed as a 3D image that can be stereoscopically viewed (see Fig. 9-3 (A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the first movable body 005SG301 moves from the front of the image display device 5 toward the display area 5E, the effect image 005SG004 corresponding to the first movable part 005SG301A is displayed as a stereoscopic special image. Therefore, the effect of the first movable body presentation can be enhanced.

Specifically, by displaying a special image that can be viewed stereoscopically at the timing when the first movable body 005SG301 moves from the front toward the rear display area 5E of the image display device 5, the operation mode of the first movable body 005SG301 is displayed. In addition, since the display mode of the special image by the image display device 5 can also create a sense of depth, the presentation effect can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
In the movable body production, the display means displays the special image in the area around the movable body (for example, the production control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the first image in the first movable body production). 1 A portion that can be displayed as a stereoscopic 3D image for the effect image 005SG004 for highlighting the movable part 005SG301A (see FIG. 9-3(A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display of the effect image 005SG004 as the special image can achieve a three-dimensional presentation, thereby improving the interest.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
In the movable body presentation, the special image is displayed on the display means with an amount of parallax such that the image appears in front of the display means (for example, for highlighting the first movable part 005SG301A). Regarding the effect image 005SG004, the effect image 005SG004 is placed in the vicinity of the first movable part 005SG301A which is actually on the front side of the display area 5E, that is, in a position away from the display area 5E on the front side like the first movable part 005SG301A. The part that can appear to be displayed (see Figure 9-3 (A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to emphasize the action of the first movable body 005SG301 on the display area 5E, and to further enhance the effect of the first movable body presentation.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The movable body is deformable between a first mode and a second mode that is smaller than the first mode,
The movable body in the second mode operates toward the display area of the display means, and the display means displays a specific image corresponding to a part of the movable body in the first mode. is possible and
The display means displays the special image in at least one of the area around the specific image and the area around the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first movable object in the first movable body effect). While moving the first movable part 005SG301A of the body 005SG301 toward the display area 5E, the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable part 005SG301B capable of recognizing the normal state before being deformed to the contracted state is displayed on the image display device 5. is displayed, and an effect image 005SG004 for highlighting the first movable part 005SG301A is displayed as a stereoscopic 3D image, and an effect for highlighting the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable part 005SG301B A portion of the image 005SG003 that can display a 2D image (see Fig. 9-3 (A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the normal state before deformation of the first movable body 005SG301 can be recognized in the first movable body rendering, the action and operation of the first movable body 005SG301 on the display area 5E can be emphasized, and the specified The effect image 005SG004, which is a special image, is displayed in the area around the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable part 005SG301B, which is an image, and in the area around the first movable part 005SG301A. The sense of unity can be further emphasized, and the effect of the first movable body presentation can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
In the movable body effect, the display means can display a special image in a shape imitating a small piece as the special image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display a 3D image that can be stereoscopically viewed for the fragment image 005SG006 of the decorative pattern). The part that can be displayed as (See Figure 9-3 (B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the fragment image 005SG006, which is a special image shaped like a small piece, can emphasize the action of the first movable body 005SG301 with respect to the display area 5E, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect of the first movable body presentation. can.

Further, the characteristic portion 005SG includes a third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a game machine provided with an operable movable body, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-194091, the movable body provided above the display means is displayed on the display means. There are those that can execute a movable body effect that rotates so as to hit the area (act on the display area). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, since the movable body only moves toward the display area of the display means, there is a problem that the rendering effect of the movable body rendering is insufficient. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can enhance the performance effect using the movable body, the game machine of the means 1 of the third invention includes:
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1A) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5);
an operable movable body (for example, a first movable body 005SG301);
with
The movable body is transformable between a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
A first effect in which the movable body performs a first action in the first mode toward the display area of the display means, and a second action in the second mode that is different from the first action. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first movable body 005SG301 from the first origin position toward the first advanced position. and a portion that moves the first movable body 005SG301 from the first origin position toward the first advanced position and moves the second movable body 005SG401 from the second origin position toward the second advanced position. Part that can perform movable body production)
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs between when the first effect is executed and when the second effect is executed (for example, when the first movable body effect is executed during super reach and when the second effect is executed). 2 A part where the ratio of control to the big hit game state is different between when the movable body effect is executed (see Fig. 10-13)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to realize different movable body effects in different modes and actions with one first movable body 005SG301, and pay attention to whether the first movable body effect or the second movable body effect is executed. to increase interest.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The movable body includes a first movable body (eg, first movable body 005SG301) and a second movable body (eg, second movable body 005SG401) different from the first movable body,
In the second effect, the second movable body can operate together with the first movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first movable body 005SG301 from the first origin position toward the first advance position). 9-2(H)), and the second movable body effect of moving the second movable body 005SG401 from the second origin position toward the second advanced position.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the rendering effect of the second movable body rendering can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
In the first effect, the second movable body is operable to overlap in front of the first movable body and to cover at least part of the deformation mechanism of the first movable body (for example, When the second movable body 005SG401 moves to the second advanced position, it overlaps in front of the first movable body 005SG301, and at least a part of the deformation mechanism of the first movable body 005SG301 (for example, the first movable A portion that can operate to cover the boundary portion P between the portion 005SG301A and the second movable portion 005SG301B).Modification (see FIG. 9-4)
It is characterized by

For example, in the second movable body effect, when the first movable body 005SG301 moves to the first advanced position and the second movable body 005SG401 moves to the second advanced position, the second movable body 005SG401 can contract and deform. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. When moving to the advanced position, at least a part of the deformation mechanism of the first movable body 005SG301 (for example, the first movable part 005SG301A and the second movable part 005SG301B) is overlapped in front of the first movable body 005SG301. may be operable to cover the boundary P of the . By doing so, the visibility of the deformation mechanism can be reduced, and the appearance of the second movable body effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The display means (for example, image display device 5) can perform variable display effects (for example, ready-to-reach effects by decorative patterns),
Depending on which of the first effect and the second effect is executed in the variable display effect, a second special variable display effect having a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first special variable display effect is produced. The execution ratio is different (for example, when the first movable body effect is executed as a development effect, it is easy to shift to weak super reach after the development effect, and when the second movable body effect is executed, after the development effect Areas where it is easy to shift to strong super reach, etc. (See Figure 10-13)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to which movable object effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect, so that the interest can be improved.

The characteristic portion 005SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions 005SG, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the characteristic part 005SG, in the first movable body rendering, the first movable part 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 is moved toward the display area 5E, and the image display device 5 corresponds to the second movable part 005SG301B. By displaying the cutting edge image 005SG002, the first movable body 005SG301, which is one object, can be recognized. The first movable body 005SG301, which is one object, may not be recognizable by the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the first movable part 005SG301A and the second movable part 005SG301B. 005SG301A is moved toward the display area 5E, and an effect image (for example, the first movable body 005SG301 may appear to collide with the display area 5E).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301, which is an example of a movable body, is an object imitating a sword, and includes a first movable section 005SG301A and a second movable section that can be stored in the first movable section 005SG301A. 005SG301B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body is not limited to an object resembling a sword. Moreover, it may not be shrinkable and deformable, for example, it may be elongated or expandable, or it may be shape-deformable such as being deformed from a circular shape to a rectangular shape. Furthermore, it may be composed of a non-deformable object.

In addition, in the characteristic part 005SG, the form using the first movable body 005SG301 is illustrated as an example of the movable body, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second movable body 005SG401 may be used. , other movable bodies may be used.

Further, in the characteristic portion 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301, which is an example of a movable body, can move forward and downward from the first origin position toward the intermediate position, and can move backward and downward from the intermediate position toward the close position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as it is operable toward at least the display area 5E, for example, the first origin position is set to the left and right side positions of the display area 5E. , and may be movable in the horizontal direction from the left and right lateral positions to an intermediate position.

Further, in the characteristic portion 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301, which is an example of a movable body, moves forward and downward from the first origin position toward the intermediate position, that is, moves away from the display area 5E. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be directly moved forward and downward from the first origin position toward the close position without passing through the intermediate position. Further, when the first origin position is the left and right side position of the display area 5E, it may be movable in the left and right direction from the left and right side position to the intermediate position along the display area 5E. Furthermore, it may be movable in a curved shape so as to gradually approach the close position from the first origin position.

Further, in the characteristic portion 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301, which is an example of the movable body, is exemplified as approaching the display area 5E by operating (moving) backward and downward from the intermediate position toward the close position. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, by deforming the movable body from the contraction mode to the normal mode (from the normal mode to the expansion mode), at least part of the movable body approaches the display area 5E, At least part of the movable body may approach the display area 5E by rotating. Note that the image display device 5 may be operable toward the first movable body 005SG301.

Further, in the characteristic portion 005SG, as an example of the specific image corresponding to the movable body, the image display device 5 uses a cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B which is a part of the first movable body 005SG301. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as it is a specific image corresponding to a movable body, it does not necessarily have to be an image in which one object can be recognized. Also, the image that makes one object recognizable does not necessarily have to show a part of the movable body. , the first movable body 005SG301, which is one object, may be recognized.

In addition, a movable body (for example, the first movable body 005SG301) is moved toward the display area without being deformed, and a special image imitating an object other than the movable body is used as a specific image corresponding to the movable body (for example, , an image simulating the second movable body 005SG401) is displayed, so that another object including the movable body (for example, the first movable body 005SG301 and the second movable body 005SG401 are united by the movable body and the special image). object) can be made recognizable.

Further, the characteristic portion 005SG is positioned at a close position so that the first movable body 005SG301, which is one object, can be recognized by displaying the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B as a specific image. Although the form in which the cutting edge image 005SG002 is displayed at a position near the bottom of the first movable body 005SG301 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position of the specific image is not the position described in the characteristic portion 005SG. For example, it may be displayed at a position away from the movable body.

Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301 moves backward and downward from the intermediate position toward the close position, thereby approaching the decorative design displayed in the central decorative design display area 5C in the display area 5E. , the form of displaying the cutting edge image 005SG002 penetrating the decorative pattern as the specific image has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect display that can be displayed by the display means is the effect other than the above decorative pattern. It may be an image.

In addition, in the characterizing part 005SG, the form in which the lower part of the first movable body 005SG301 approaches the display area 5E when the first movable body 005SG301 moves from the intermediate position to the close position was exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be arranged so that it abuts on the display area 5E instead of being placed on the display area 5E. Alternatively, when the first movable body 005SG301 moves from the intermediate position to the close position, a separate movable body (for example, a second movable body 005SG401, etc.) or a transparent member is provided between the first movable body 005SG301 and the display area 5E. etc. may be moved to bring the first movable body 005SG301 close to or in contact with the movable body.

For example, it may be an effect image imitating the first movable body 005SG301 or the second movable body 005SG401, or may be a character image. Further, a reserved memory image capable of displaying reserved memory, an active display image showing an active display area corresponding to the variable display, or the like may be used as the effect display. Furthermore, when the effect display is a suspended memory display image or an active display image, the display modes of the suspended memory display and the active display can be changed by operating the movable body to act toward these images. good.

Further, in the characteristic portion 005SG, in the first movable body rendering, the first movable portion 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 is moved toward the display area 5E, and the image display device 5 moves the first movable portion 005SG301A. Although the effect image 005SG004 for highlighting has been exemplified as a 3D image that can be viewed stereoscopically, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special image that can be viewed stereoscopically includes the first movable part 005SG301A. It does not have to be an effect image for highlighting. For example, the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable part 005SG301B may be displayed as a stereoscopic 3D image. Also, an image that does not correspond to the first movable body 005SG301 (for example, a background image or the like) may be displayed as a stereoscopic special image.

In addition, in the characteristic part 005SG, the form using the fragment image 005SG006 of the ornamental design is exemplified as the special image of the shape imitating the small piece that can be stereoscopically viewed on the display means, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it is possible to display an image simulating a piece of glass when the image display device 5 is destroyed, an image simulating a fragment when the first movable body 005SG301 or the second movable body 005SG401 is destroyed, etc. as a special image. may be

In addition, in the characterizing part 005SG, a form is exemplified in which the second movable body effect is applied as the second effect in which the movable body performs the second action different from the first action in the second mode, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the second action of the first movable body 005SG301 in the second movable body effect is different from the first action, for example, it can move vertically and horizontally from the first origin position along the display area 5E. As described in the characterizing portion 005SG, the movement other than moving away from the display area 5E from the first origin position toward the first advance position is included.

In addition, in the characteristic part 005SG, when the second movable body effect is executed during super reach, the control to the jackpot game state is exemplified at a higher rate than when the first movable body effect is executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the ratio of control to the jackpot game state should be different between when the first movable body effect is executed and when the second movable body effect is executed. For example, when the first movable body effect is executed during super reach, the control to the big win game state may be performed at a higher rate than when the second movable body effect is executed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 005SG, an example is given in which the jackpot game state is applied as a state advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the state advantageous to the player is a probability variable state. , Time saving state (high base state), small winning game state, small winning high probability state (KT state) in which small winning occurs frequently and game balls can win in the big winning opening, etc. .

Further, in the characterizing part 005SG, the first movable object effect and the second movable object effect, which are examples of the first effect and the second effect, are selectively executed at a predetermined timing in one variable display period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The second movable body effect may be executed at a different second timing (for example, strong SP reach development timing). In addition, the first movable object effect is executed at a first timing (for example, the start timing of the variable display before the target change) over a plurality of variable displays, and a second timing different from the first timing (for example, the start of the target change) timing, etc.), the second movable body effect may be executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 005SG, as an example of the first effect and the second effect, a form is illustrated in which the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect are set to be executed as the development effect executed during the super reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these first movable body effects and second movable body effects are set as effects to be executed in anticipation notices, big hit notices, probability variable promotion effects, and jackpot middle effects. may

In addition, in the characterizing part 005SG, the development production is illustrated as a production that suggests whether or not super reach will develop to weak super reach or strong super reach, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be executable at the timing of developing from normal reach to super reach, or at the timing of developing from weak super reach to strong super reach. That is, it may be executable at a plurality of timings during one variable display. Furthermore, when it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice (premonition effect, etc.) in which it is possible to determine whether or not a big win will occur in response to the occurrence of a start winning, and to execute a suggestive effect according to the determination result over multiple variable displays. , it may be possible to execute development effects at a plurality of timings in a plurality of variable displays (for example, at the end or start of each variable display).

In addition, in the characteristic part 005SG, when the first movable body effect is executed as the development effect, it is easy to shift to the weak super reach after the development effect, and when the second movable body effect is executed, the strong super reach is performed after the development effect. Although the form in which transition to super reach is easily performed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined whether the first movable body effect or the second movable body effect is executed in the reach during effect. Depending on this, the ratio of executing super reach with a higher ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state than normal reach may be different, or a special super with a higher ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state than super reach. Reach may be performed at different rates.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 177SG)
FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area 177SG10 is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into this game area. In addition, the game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 177SG50 having a glass window 177SG50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area 177SG10 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 177SG50. When the glass door frame 177SG50 is closed, the game area 177SG10 can be seen through the glass window 177SG50a.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the game board 2 is made of translucent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, etc., and is formed in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. It consists of a board 2A provided with nails (not shown), guide rails 177SG2b, etc., and a spacer member 2B integrally attached to the back side of the board 2A. The game board 2 is made of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. may be configured

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 10-1), a variable display of special symbols (also called special symbols) as special identification information of multiple types (also called special symbols games ), a first special symbol display device 177SG4A and a second special symbol display device 177SG4B are provided. These are composed of 7-segment LEDs (light emitting diodes) or the like, and the special patterns may be numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 177SG4A is also called "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 177SG4B is also called "second special symbol". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 . The opening 177SG2c of the game board 2 is provided with a frame-shaped center decorative frame 177SG51.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special-design game and decoration design which are performed synchronously is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display. In the display area, a first suspended display image (here, a circle image) corresponding to the first special game whose execution is suspended (variable display of decorative symbols) is displayed right-aligned, and the execution is suspended. A second reserved display image (here, a circle image) corresponding to the second special symbol game (variable display of decorative symbols) is displayed left aligned.

A first reserved memory display area 177SG5D and a second reserved memory display area 177SG5U are set at two locations on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 177SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 177SG5U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the reserved memory number (special figure reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 177SG6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 177SG6B. ) based on starting winnings by That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing a variable display game such as a special game or a variable display of effect symbols has been established, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in a jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established starting condition is suspended when the starting condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not established. done. In the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, the holding memory display generated based on the starting winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening is a round white display, and the second starting winning opening is displayed. Similarly, the reserved memory display generated based on the starting winning by passing (entering) the game ball is a round black display.

In the following description, the first reserved memory display area 17'SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 177SG5U may be referred to as reserved display areas, and the number of reserved memories is the first reserved memory display area 177SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 177SG5D. It can be recognized by the number of pending memory displays displayed in the memory display area 177SG5U. Furthermore, a display in which the pending storage indications are collected may be referred to as a pending indication.

The reservation display in the first reservation memory display area 177SG5D and the second reservation memory display area 177SG5U is generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, or the second The display mode (for example, display color or shape) may be changed depending on whether the game ball passes (enters) the starting winning hole based on the starting winning. In this embodiment, "execution" and "implementation" are synonymous.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1, along with the reserved storage display area, the upper and lower parts of the first special design display device 177SG4A and the second special design display device 177SG4B, the special design reservation storage number for identifiable display A 1 pending display 177SG25A and a 2nd pending display 177SG25B are provided. The 1st reservation display 177SG25A displays the number of the 1st special figure reservation memories so that it can be specified. The second reservation display 177SG25B displays the number of second special figure reservation storage so as to be identifiable. The first special figure pending storage number is the number of memories in which the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure pending storage number is the number of memories in which the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The number of reserved memories of the variable display obtained by adding the number of first special figure reserved memories and the number of second special figure reserved memories is also called the total number of reserved memories. When simply referring to the "special figure reserved memory number", it usually refers to the concept including all of the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number, but in particular, some of these (for example A concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total number of reserved memory).

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 177SG6A and a variable winning ball device 177SG6B are provided.

Winning ball device 177SG6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 177SG6B is a normal electric accessory having a movable plate that changes between a closed state as a first projecting position and an open state as a retracted position by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 10-2) for a normal electric accessory. to form a second start winning opening. In the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, for example, when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable plate moves to the first protruding position, so that the movable plate protrudes toward the game area 177SG10, and the game ball enters the second starting winning hole. It will be in a closed state that does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 177SG6B is in the retracted position in which the movable plate retracts toward the game board 2 when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, so that the game ball can enter the second start winning opening. (It is also said that the second start winning opening is in an open state.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started.

A special variable winning ball device 177SG7 having a large winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 177SG6A and the variable winning ball device 177SG6B. The special variable winning ball device 177SG7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 10-2). form the mouth.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 177SG7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the big winning gate door closes the big winning gate, and the game ball is pushed up. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 177SG7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more winning balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including general winning holes is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 177SG20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 10-1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 177SG20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 177SG41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 177SG41, the normal game is executed.

On the right side of the normal pattern display 177SG20, a normal pattern suspension display 177SG25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 177SG25C is configured including, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

Between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof, an effect device 177SG300 that operates according to the effect is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 10-2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 10-2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 177SG41, the normal pattern display device 177SG20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 177SG41 during the period during the execution of the previous general game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 177SG41 but the general game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "per normal", the variable winning ball device 177SG6B is opened for a predetermined period of time open control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 177SG6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 177SG4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 177SG4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 177SG7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on/lighting off, motion of a movable body of the production device 177SG300, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, 177SG5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C and 177SG5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C and 177SG5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. 10-2, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 177SG4A, second special symbol display device 177SG4B, normal symbol display device 177SG20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 177SG25A, the second holding display 177SG25B, the normal drawing holding display 177SG25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body of the production device 177SG300, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body of the effect device 177SG300 to the movable body of the effect device 177SG300 or the drive circuit that drives the movable body of the effect device 177SG300.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable bodies of the production device 177SG300 (supply of signals for operating the movable bodies of the production device 177SG300, etc.) It may be executed by the control CPU 120 .

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Game progress, performance progress, etc.)
A game medium (game ball) is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1 .

(Progress of game controlled by main board 11)
When the game ball flowing down the game area passes through the passage gate 177SG41, the general pattern game (variable display of normal patterns) is started. In addition, when the normal game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another normal game is already running or during the opening control described below, the normal game will be set to 4, etc. is suspended. The suspended general-purpose game is executed when a start condition for starting the general-purpose game is met (other general-purpose games are not being executed, opening control is not being performed, etc.). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 177SG41 while the normal pattern reservation memory number has reached the upper limit, the normal pattern reservation memory number does not increase and the passage is invalidated.

Fluctuation display results that are stopped and displayed in the general game include a general pattern that wins (for example, a general pattern such as "7") and a general pattern that loses (for example, a general pattern such as "-"). . When the pattern per normal pattern is stopped and displayed (derived), it is when the fluctuation display result is "per normal pattern". When the general pattern losing pattern is stopped and displayed (derived), it is when the fluctuation display result is "normal pattern loss".

At the time of "normal figure hit", opening control (the second start winning opening is opened) is performed to set the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 177SG6B to the tilted position for a predetermined period. At the time of "universal figure loss", the opening control is not performed.

When the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 177SG6A, the first special game is started. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, the second special game is started. In addition, when the special game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another special game is already running or when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later, four The execution of the special game is suspended with such as the upper limit. The suspended special game is executed when a start condition for starting the special game is met (no other special game is being executed, the jackpot game is not in progress, etc.).

When the game ball enters the first start winning opening when the number of the first special figure reserved memory reaches the upper limit, the entry is invalidated without increasing the number of the first special figure reserved memory ( There may be prize balls). When the game ball enters the second start winning opening when the second special figure reserved memory number reaches the upper limit, the entry is invalidated without increasing the second special figure reserved memory number ( There may be prize balls).

The entry (winning) of the game ball to the first start winning opening that increases the number of first special figure reservation memories is also called the first starting winning. The entry (winning) of the game ball to the second starting winning opening that increases the number of second special figure reservation memories is also called the second starting winning. These winnings are collectively referred to simply as starting winnings.

Variable display results to be stopped and displayed in the special game include big hit symbols (for example, special symbols such as "3" and "7") and losing symbols (for example, special symbols such as "-"). . When the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed (derived), it is when the variable display result is "jackpot". When the lost symbols are stopped and displayed (derived), the variable display result is "loss".

When the variable display result of the first special game or the second special game is "big win" (specific display result), the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. When the variable display result is "losing", the game is not controlled to the big win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 177SG7 is in an open state. The open state is until the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever is earlier. Continued. Such an open state is called a round game (simply referred to as "round"). In the jackpot game state, the round game is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, "15 times") is reached (during periods other than the round game, the big winning opening is closed).

In the "jackpot", jackpot types such as "non-probability variation" and "probability variation" are set. When the jackpot type is "non-variable probability", the jackpot symbol "3" is stop-displayed. When the jackpot type is "probability variable", the jackpot symbol "7" is stop-displayed.

A ``big hit'' when the jackpot type is ``variable probability'' is sometimes referred to as a ``variable probability big hit'', and a ``jackpot'' when the type of jackpot is ``non-variable probability'' is sometimes referred to as a ``non-variable probability jackpot''. In addition, the big hit game state based on the "variable probability big win" may be referred to as "variable probability big win game state". In addition, the big hit game state based on the "non-probability variation big hit" may be referred to as "non-probability variation big hit game state".

After the variable probability big win game state is finished, the probability that the variable display result becomes "big win" (big win probability) is controlled to a variable probability state higher than that in the normal state. The variable probability state continues until the next big hit game state is started.

After the probability variable big win game state or the non-probability variable big win game state is finished, the average variable display time (variable display period) is controlled to a short time state shorter than the normal state. In the time-saving state, either one of the execution of the special figure game for a predetermined number of times (100 times in this characteristic portion 177SG) and the start of the next big hit game state is established first. Continue until you do.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the variable winning ball device 177SG6B is opened and closed in an advantageous change mode in which the game balls are more likely to enter the second start winning opening than in the non-time-saving state such as the normal state. may be changed to For example, control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal pattern in the general pattern game (the period of variable display of the general pattern, also referred to as the normal pattern fluctuation time) than in the normal state, and variable display in each general pattern game The variable winning ball device 177SG6B may be changed between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous manner by controlling to improve the probability that the result will be a "normal hit" than in the normal state. Such control is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as "time reduction control" or "high base control"). By being controlled in such a time-saving state, the required time until the next variable display result becomes "big hit" is shortened, and the game state becomes more advantageous to the player than in the normal state.

In addition, the normal state is a game state other than an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability of being a "hit" and the probability that the variation display result in the special game is a "big hit", is in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, the power supply This is the state in which the control is the same as when the predetermined return processing is not executed after the power is turned on.

The time saving state is also referred to as "high base", and the game state that is not the time saving state is also referred to as "low base", "non-time saving state", and the like. The variable probability state is also called "high probability", and the game state that is not the variable probability state is also called "low probability", "non-probability change", and the like.

(Progress of the game controlled by the effect control board 12)
The "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R provided in the image display device 5 correspond to the start of the first special game or the second special game. Then, the variable display of decorative patterns (this is also a kind of presentation) is started. In the first special game and the second special game, at the timing when the variable display result (also referred to as the fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed, the fixed decorative pattern (which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (variable display result) A combination of three decorative patterns) is also stopped (derivatively displayed).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design until the end, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined ready-to-win mode (ready-to-win is established). Here, the ready-to-win state refers to a decorative pattern that is not yet stopped when the decorative patterns stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later (“reach fluctuation Also referred to as "pattern") is a display mode that continues to fluctuate.

Also, in this characteristic portion 177SG, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win state during variable display. As ready-to-win effects, normal ready-to-win, super ready-to-win A, super ready-to-win B, super ready-to-win C, and super ready-to-win D are prepared. In this characteristic portion 177SG, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high in the order of super reach D>super reach C>super reach B>super reach A>normal reach.

The degree of expectation for a big hit is, for example, the rate at which the variable display result of the special game is a "big hit", and here, it is also the rate at which the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is a "big hit".

When the result of the variable display of the special figure game is "big hit", the fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern. (The display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, 177SG5R When , "6" etc.) are all stopped and displayed.

When the variable display result is "losing", the variable display mode of the decorative patterns does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the determined decorative patterns of the non-ready-to-win combination are displayed in a stopped state as the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns. There is In addition, when the variable display result is "losing", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach-losing combination") that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern. ”) may be stopped and displayed.

The performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing various performances related to the game, such as variable display control of decorative symbols and advance notice performance, based on performance control commands (control information) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. .

Note that the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect during the variable display of decorative patterns, for example, a big hit notice effect suggesting the possibility of a big win, a reach notice suggesting whether or not a reach will occur, and a stop pattern. Multiple notices that are executed at the start of the variable display and when the reach is established, such as the stop symbol notice to be announced, and the latent notice to announce whether the game state is in the probability fluctuation state (whether it is hidden or not). include.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 177SG, as various effects including the above notice, it is possible to execute a movable body effect by the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R of the effect device 177SG300 and a composite effect by the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9. . These various effects are executed, for example, at a predetermined timing during variable display or at timing when the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In this characterizing section 177SG, an effect using the effect device 177SG300 is executed when Super Reach is executed (details will be described later).

(Production device 177SG300)
Next, the details of the rendering device 177SG300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-3 to 10-15. 10-3, (A) is a front view showing a state in which the movable body of the effect device is at the first position, and (B) is a front view showing a state in which the movable body of the effect device is at the second position. FIG. 10-4 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the rendering device as seen obliquely from the front. FIG. 10-5 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the production device as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 10-6 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the movable body as seen obliquely from the front. FIG. 10-7 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the movable body as seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 10-8 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which (A) the rotating portion is in the first projecting position, and (B) a state in which the rotating portion is in the retracted position. FIG. 10-9 is a fragmentary cross-sectional view showing the structure of the lower portion of the movable body. 10-10, (A) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the first drive mechanism, and (B) is a plan view showing the guided member. 10-11 are plan views showing the relationship between the guide groove, the guided member, and the movable body. FIGS. 10-12 are diagrams showing the operation modes of the guided member and the movable portion (A) to (E). 10-13, (F) to (J) are diagrams showing operation modes of the guided member and the movable part. 10-14 (A) to (C) are schematic explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between the movable body and the image display device. 10-15 are explanatory diagrams showing a state where the movable body is in the lowered position in (A) and a state in which the movable body is in the raised position in (B). 16A to 16F are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the operation mode of the movable body in super reach.

In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is defined as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is defined as the rear. Also, the description will be made with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions as seen from the player positioned in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

As shown in FIGS. 10-3 to 10-5, the effect device 177SG300 includes a base frame 177SG301 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, and a base frame 177SG301 provided to be movable in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction with respect to the base frame 177SG301. a first drive mechanism 177SG303 for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R in the horizontal direction; and a second drive mechanism 177SG304 for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R in the vertical direction, The image display device 5 can be visually recognized through the opening of the base frame 177SG301. The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are in contact with each other (or 10-3 (B) and the lowered position shown in FIG. 10-3(A). It is movable in the vertical direction between the illustrated elevated position, and can change its orientation (orientation) at a third position between the first position and the second position.

Next, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7. Since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are bilaterally symmetrical and have substantially the same structure, the left movable body 177SG302L will be described below, and the description of the right movable body 177SG302R will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7, the movable body 177SG302L includes a movable body 177SG310 which is movable in the left-right direction by the first drive mechanism 177SG303 and which is non-rotatable, and a position below the movable body 177SG310. At a position above the guided member 177SG320 and the moving body 177SG310, which are guided by the guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R, which will be described later, the guide member 177SG320 is rotatable together with the guided member 177SG320 and vertically with respect to the moving body 177SG310 and the guided member 177SG320. and a movable portion 177SG330 that is movably provided.

The movable part 177SG330 has a pedestal 177SG331 attached to the upper end of a rotating shaft 177SG311 that vertically penetrates the moving body 177SG310, and a guide rod 177SG337, which will be described later, above the pedestal 177SG331. A rotating base 177SG332 provided, a front cover 177SG333 covering the front side of the rotating base 177SG332, a rear cover 177SG334 covering the rear side of the rotating base 177SG332, and capable of rotating vertically with respect to the rotating base 177SG332. and a rotating member 177SG335 provided in the .

A guide rod 177SG337 facing in the vertical direction is erected at the front left corner of the upper surface of the pedestal 177SG331. A rotation stopping member 177SG336 for restricting rotation around the guide rod 177SG337 is erected at the corner. The rotation stopping member 177SG336 has a length that can restrict the rotation of the rotation base 177SG332 between the lowered position and the raised position, which will be described later.

An LED board 177SG339 on which a plurality of movable LEDs 177SG338F are mounted so as to be able to irradiate light forward is attached to the front upper portion of the rotating base 177SG332. Light is emitted outward through a translucent lens portion 177SG340F formed on the front cover 177SG333. In addition, although not shown, a plurality of movable LEDs 177SG338B are mounted on the rear surface of the LED substrate 177SG339 so as to be able to emit light toward the front. The light is emitted outward through a translucent lens portion 177SG340B formed on 177SG334.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6 to 10-8, a first rotating shaft 177SG360 facing in the front-rear direction protrudes from the lower front surface of the rotating base 177SG332. A first link member 177SG361 whose one end is pivotally supported by a first shaft portion of a rotating member 177SG335 via a pivot 177SG364 is rotatably supported. A second rotating shaft 177SG362 projects from the front surface of the rotating base 177SG332 below the first rotating shaft 177SG360. A second link member 177SG363 pivotally supported on the two shafts via a pivot 177SG365 is rotatably supported.

An arc-shaped gear portion 177SG366 is formed on a part of the peripheral edge of the second rotation shaft 177SG362 in the second link member 177SG363. A drive gear 177SG368 fixed to the drive shaft of the motor 177SG367 is engaged.

The rotating member 177SG335 has a first projecting position (origin position) projecting downward to the right side with respect to the rotating base 177SG332, as shown in FIG. 10-8(A), and a , and an accommodation position (see FIG. 10-8(B)) in which a portion is accommodated between the rotation base 177SG332 and the front cover 177SG333 by retreating from the first projecting position toward the rotation base 177SG332. rotatably provided. In addition, a second projecting position (refer to FIG. 10-3(B)) projecting upward to the right with respect to the rotation base 177SG332 between the first projecting position (origin position, see FIG. 10-3(A)) and the housing position. ) can also be stopped.

More specifically, in the first projecting position shown in FIG. 10-8(A), the upper portion of the second link member 177SG363 is slightly tilted to the left and comes into contact with the boss 177SG369 protruding from the rotation base 177SG332 to rotate counterclockwise. The downward rotation of the rotating member 177SG335 is restricted by restricting the rotation around. Here, as shown in FIG. 10-8(B), the drive gear 177SG368 is rotated by the rotation motor 177SG367, so that the second link member 177SG363 rotates clockwise and the pivot 177SG365 rotates the second rotation. While moving in an arc around the shaft 177SG362, the first link member 177SG361 rotates counterclockwise and the pivot 177SG364 moves in an arc around the first rotation shaft 177SG360. The member 177SG335 rotates from the first projecting position toward the retracted position. In this way, the two first link members 177SG361 and the second link members 177SG363 are pivotally supported at two locations, so that they can be rotated more compactly than rotating about one axis.

At the upper end of the front cover 177SG333, fixed rails 177SG350L and 177SG350R (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4) extending in the horizontal direction on the upper side of the base frame 177SG301 and between these fixed rails 177SG350L and 177SG350R A guide portion 177SG342 which is moved and guided in the left-right direction by a movable rail 177SG351 which is provided movably in the vertical direction is attached to a rotating base 177SG332 so as to be rotatable about a shaft portion 177SG343 directed in the vertical direction.

In this way, the movable portion 177SG330 is composed of a movable base portion 177SG330A, which is formed by attaching and integrating the front cover 177SG333 and the rear cover 177SG334 to the front and rear surfaces of the rotary base 177SG332, and the movable base portion 177SG330A. and a rotating portion 177SG330B composed of a rotating member 177SG335 provided to be rotatable in the direction, and a first state in which the rotating portion 177SG330B is at the first protruding position or the second protruding position, and a first state in which the rotating portion 177SG330B is in the It can be changed to a second state in which it is in the housed position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the movable base portion 177SG330A is a half of the fuselage of an airplane, the rotating portion 177SG330B is shaped like a wing, the movable body 177SG302L is the right half of the airplane, and the movable body 177SG302R is a It is said to be a model that constitutes the left half of the airplane. On the other hand, frame covers 177SG370L and 177SG370R modeled after a half of an airplane having translucent lens portions 177SG371L and 177SG371R are attached to the left and right side portions of the base frame 177SG301, respectively.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10-3(A), when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the first position, the right half of the airplane is simulated by the front cover 177SG333 of the left movable body 177SG302L and the frame body cover 177SG370L. A first left effect portion is formed, and the front cover 177SG333 of the right movable body 177SG302R and the frame body cover 177SG370R form a first right effect portion imitating the left half of an airplane.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3(B), when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the second position, the rear cover 177SG334 of the left movable body 177SG302L and the rear cover 177SG334 of the right movable body 177SG302R are moved to the left and right. By arranging them side by side and uniting them, a single second effect part that imitates the whole airplane is formed.

In addition, a part of the first left effect part and the first right effect part includes the translucent lens part 177SG340F of the front cover 177SG333 that imitates the half of the cockpit and the translucent lens parts 177SG371L, 177SG371R of the frame covers 177SG370L, 177SG370R. , one first light emitting portion is configured, and one second light emitting portion is configured by left and right translucent lens portions 177SG340B and 177SG340B that imitate the half of the cockpit of the rear cover 177SG334 in a part of the second effect portion. be.

As shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10(A), a vertical hole 177SG312 is formed through the moving body 177SG310 in the vertical direction, and the rotating shaft 177SG311 is rotatably inserted into the vertical hole 177SG312. It is The upper portion of the rotary shaft 177SG311 is non-rotatably fitted in a shaft hole 177SG313 formed in the base 177SG331. A horizontal hole 177SG314 penetrating in the horizontal direction is formed in the moving body 177SG310 so as not to intersect with the vertical hole 177SG312.

The rotary shaft 177SG311 has an upper portion non-rotatably fitted in a shaft hole 177SG313 formed in the base 177SG331, and a lower portion non-rotatably fitted in a shaft hole 177SG321 of the guided member 177SG320. That is, since the movable portion 177SG330 and the guided member 177SG320 are integrated via the rotating shaft 177SG311, the guided member 177SG320 constitutes a part of the movable portion 177SG330.

As shown in FIG. 10-10(B), the guided member 177SG320 is a disk-shaped member centered on a circular shaft hole 177SG321. Contact recesses 177SG322A and 177SG322B capable of accommodating contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B, which will be described later, are formed at two locations on the right side of the peripheral wall at intervals of about 90 degrees. is formed. In addition, the peripheral wall 177SG322C on the rear side of the contact recess 177SG322A and the peripheral wall 177SG322D on the front side of the contact recess 177SG322B extend outward from the arc centered on the shaft hole 177SG321 (see the dashed line in FIG. 10-10(B)). Peripheral walls 177SG322E and 177SG322F linearly extending leftward from the tips of these peripheral walls 177SG322C and 177SG322D are substantially parallel to each other. That is, rotation restricting portions 177SG325A and 177SG325 protruding outward from an arc centered on the shaft hole 177SG321 are formed at the tip portions of the peripheral walls 177SG322C and 177SG322E and the tip portions of the peripheral walls 177SG322D and 177SG322F. The guide member 177SG320 is formed in a non-circular shape.

As shown in FIGS. 10-10 to 10-13, linear guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R are formed on the top surface of the member that forms the lower side of the base frame 177SG301 to guide the moving body 177SG310 in the horizontal direction. It is Specifically, the guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R are formed by a bottom wall 177SG381, a front wall 177SG382, and a rear wall 177SG383 in a groove shape that opens upward in a vertical cross-sectional view, and are provided so that the guided member 177SG320 can move in the left-right direction. It is The front-to-rear dimension L1 of the guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R is slightly longer than the diameter 2R of the guided member 177SG320 and shorter than the dimension L2 passing through the vertexes and centers of the rotation restricting portions 177SG325A and 177SG325 of the guided member 177SG320. (2R<L1<L2).

At the left and right ends of the guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R, respectively, there are transmission gear groups 177SG392R that are engaged with the engaging recesses 177SG323 of the guided member 177SG320 when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are positioned at the first position, and a locking piece 177SG324B that is locked to the locking concave portion 177SG323 of the guided member 177SG320 when the bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are positioned at the second position, and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the first position and the locking piece 177SG324B. Rotation at the second position is restricted.

Columnar abutting bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B are erected in the vicinity of the rear wall 177SG383 at approximately the center position in the longitudinal direction of the bottom wall 177SG381 and separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. Portions of the rear wall 177SG383 corresponding to the abutment bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B bulge rearward to accommodate the rotation restricting portions 177SG325A and 177SG325 when the guided member 177SG320 rotates, as will be described later. Recesses 177SG386A and 177SG386B are formed inside. A bearing portion 177SG387 is formed between the left and right guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R.

The first drive mechanism 177SG303 includes drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R for moving the moving body 177SG310, movement motors 117SG391L and 117SG391R for rotating the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R about their axes, movement motors 117SG391L, A transmission gear group 177SG392L, 177SG392R consisting of a plurality of driven gears for transmitting the power of 117SG391R to drive shafts 177SG390L, 177SG390R.

The first drive mechanism 117SG303 includes an origin detection sensor 177SG401 capable of detecting that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin position (first position), and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R at the combined position (second position). position) is provided, and the origin detection sensor 177SG401 and the combination detection sensor 177SG402 are connected to the effect control board 12 .

The drive shafts 177SG390L, 177SG390R extend in the left-right direction along the upper portion of the front wall 177SG382, one end of which is pivotally supported by the central bearing portion 177SG387, and the other end of which is pivotally connected to the left and right portions of the guide grooves 177SG380L, 177SG380R. supported. A moving body 177SG310 is inserted through a horizontal hole 177SG314 in the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R. A locking portion 177SG315 projecting from the surface is slidably locked. Therefore, in the moving body 177SG310, the guided member 177SG320 connected via the rotating shaft 177SG311 is guided by the guide grooves 177SG380L, 177SG380R so as to be movable in the left-right direction, and the rotation around the driving shafts 177SG390L, 177SG390R is restricted. Therefore, the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R rotate to move in the left-right direction.

Next, operation modes of the first drive mechanism 177SG303 and the movable body 177SG302L will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13. Since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are bilaterally symmetrical and have substantially the same operation mode, only the operation mode of the movable body 177SG302L will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 10-12(A), when the movable body 177SG302L is at the first position, the guided member 177SG320 is in a state where the transmission gear group 177SG392R is locked in the locking recess 177SG323 at the left end of the guide groove 177SG380L. maintained in At this time, the front cover 177SG333 of the movable portion 177SG330 faces forward, and the rotating portion 177SG330B is positioned at the first projecting position.

As shown in FIG. 10-12(B), the movement motor 117SG391L rotates the drive shaft 177SG390L, thereby moving the moving body 177SG310 rightward. At this time, the peripheral wall 177SG322E of the guided member 177SG322E approaches the front wall 177SG382 in a substantially parallel manner, and the peripheral wall 177SG322F approaches the rear wall 177SG383 in a substantially parallel manner. Therefore, the movable portion 177SG330 moves rightward without changing its direction. Then, when the peripheral wall 177SG322C is moved to the third position between the first position and the second position, the peripheral wall 177SG322C contacts the contact boss 177SG385A.

As shown in FIGS. 10-12(C) and 10-12(D), the contact boss 177SG385A is arranged at a position shifted rearward from the movement locus of the rotation shaft 177SG311, which is the center of the guided member 177SG320. As a result, the moving body 177SG310 continues to move rightward, and when the peripheral wall 177SG322C comes into contact with the contact boss 177SG385A at the third position, it moves rightward while maintaining the contact state. As a result, the guided member 177SG320 rotates counterclockwise around the contact boss 177SG385A. Further, as shown in the middle enlarged view of FIG. 10-12(C), the distal end of the rotation restricting portion 177SG325A is housed in the housing recess 177SG386A, thereby allowing the guided member 177SG320 to rotate within the guide groove 177SG380L. . Further, as the guided member 177SG320 rotates, the contact boss 177SG385A is housed in the contact recess 177SG322A.

As shown in FIG. 10-12(E), when the peripheral wall 177SG322C contacts the contact boss 177SG385A and the guided member 177SG320 rotates about 90 degrees, the peripheral wall 177SG322C contacts the contact boss 177SG385A. In this state, the peripheral wall 177SG322D of the contact recess 177SG322B contacts the contact boss 177SG385B.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 10-13(F) to 10-13(H), the moving body 177SG310 continues to move to the right, so that the peripheral wall 177SG322C comes into contact with the contact boss 177SG385A. Although released, the peripheral wall 177SG322D continues to move rightward while maintaining contact with the contact boss 177SG385B, whereby the guided member 177SG320 rotates counterclockwise around the contact boss 177SG385B. To go. Further, as shown in the middle enlarged view of FIG. 10-13(H), the leading end of the rotation restricting portion 177SG325B is housed in the housing recess 177SG386B, thereby allowing the guided member 177SG320 to rotate. Further, as the guided member 177SG320 rotates, the contact boss 177SG385B is accommodated in the contact recess 177SG322B.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13(I), as the guided member 177SG320 rotates about 180 degrees, the movable portion 177SG330 integrated with the guided member 177SG320 rotates about 180 degrees about the rotating shaft 177SG311. The direction (orientation) is changed by rotating. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(B) to 10-13(I), two contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B are arranged apart in the moving direction of the movable body 177SG302L, and the peripheral wall 177SG322C is for contact. The contact with the boss 177SG385A is released and the peripheral wall 177SG322D comes into contact with the contact boss 177SG385B, thereby continuing the rotation.

As shown in FIG. 10-13(J), after the peripheral wall 177SG322D is released from the contact boss 177SG385B, it moves rightward without changing its orientation. At this time, the peripheral wall 177SG322F of the guided member 177SG320 approaches the front wall 177SG382 in a substantially parallel manner, and the peripheral wall 177SG322E approaches the rear wall 177SG383 in a substantially parallel manner. Therefore, the movable portion 177SG330 moves rightward without changing its direction. When the movable body 177SG302L reaches the second position, the guided member 177SG320 is maintained in a state in which the locking piece 177SG324B is locked to the locking recess 177SG323 at the right end of the guide groove 177SG380L. At this time, the rear cover 177SG334 of the movable portion 177SG330 faces forward, and the rotating portion 177SG330B is positioned at the retracted position.

Although the details of the operation mode when the movable body 177SG302L moves from the second position to the first position are omitted, the direction is changed by rotating in the opposite direction to when moving from the first position to the second position. It will be.

In this way, the movable body 177SG302L contacts the contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B at the third position on the way from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position. By continuing to move rightward or leftward while maintaining the state, the guided member 177SG320 rotates about 180 degrees, so that the direction (posture) of the movable part 177SG330 changes from forward (first posture) to backward (second posture). ).

Next, the positional relationship between the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, the image display device 5 and the game board 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14.

As shown in FIG. 10-14(A), when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the first position, the rotating portion 177SG330B is at the first projecting position. Since the distance L3 from the rotating shaft 177SG311 to the display screen of the image display device 5 is shorter than the length L4 from the rotating shaft 177SG311 to the tip of the rotating portion 177SG330B at the first projecting position (L3< L4), when the movable portion 177SG330 attempts to rotate at the third position in the first state in which the rotating portion 177SG330B protrudes to the first protruding position, the rotating portion 177SG330B contacts the display screen of the image display device 5. end up

Further, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the second position, the rotating portion 177SG330B is at the second projecting position. Since the distance L3 from the rotating shaft 177SG311 to the display screen of the image display device 5 is shorter than the length L5 from the rotating shaft 177SG311 to the tip of the rotating portion 177SG330B at the second projecting position (L3< L5), when the movable portion 177SG330 attempts to rotate at the third position in the first state in which the rotating portion 177SG330B protrudes to the second protruding position, the rotating portion 177SG330B contacts the display screen of the image display device 5. end up

Therefore, before the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R rotate, that is, before they reach the third position, as shown in FIG. By moving the movable portion 177SG330 from the first state to the second state, the distance L3 from the rotation shaft 177SG311 to the display screen of the image display device 5 is changed from the rotation shaft 177SG311 to the accommodation position. (L3>L6), the rotating portion 177SG330B is prevented from contacting the display screen of the image display device 5 during rotation. be.

Next, the second drive mechanism 177SG304 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-4, 10-5 and 10-15. As shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5, the second drive mechanism 177SG304 includes a lifting motor 177SG305 fixed to a mounting member 177SG308 attached to the rear surface of the upper side of the base frame 177SG301, and a lifting motor 177SG305. It has a driven gear 177SG306 that meshes with the drive gear 177SG305A, and a connecting elongated hole 177SG307A into which a connecting shaft 177SG306A is inserted, one end of which is pivotally supported by a mounting member 177SG308 and protrudes near the peripheral edge of the front surface of the driven gear 177SG306, and a lifting arm 177SG307 having a movable rail 177SG351 pivotally supported at its tip.

The movable rail 177SG351 is moved vertically by inserting guide rollers 177SG352, 177SG352 provided on the left and right sides of the rear surface into a pair of vertically facing elevation guides 177SG353, 177SG353 formed on the upper side of the base frame 177SG301. You are guided. Between the lift guides 177SG353 and 177SG353, a long hole 177SG354 is formed in the vertical direction for inserting the connecting shaft between the tip of the lift arm 177SG307 and the movable rail 177SG351. In the second drive mechanism 177SG304 configured in this manner, the movable rail 177SG351 moves vertically by rotating the lifting arm 177SG307 around one end by the lifting motor 177SG305.

Next, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 in the characterizing portion 177SG of the present embodiment will be described. A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

FIG. 10-16(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-16(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), the command 8001H is the first variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 177SG4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 177SG4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C and 177SG5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which one of a plurality of types should be the jackpot type in the case of a "jackpot".

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-16B, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "loss". The command 8C01H is a second variation display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A". The command 8C02H is a third variation display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B". The command 8C03H is a fourth variation display result specification command for notifying the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result that the variation display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a jackpot end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the jackpot game state.

In the jackpot start designation command and the jackpot end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command and the jackpot end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relation in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state or the short-term opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "16") is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 177SG6A is detected by the first starting hole switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 177SG4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 177SG6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 177SG4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the number of special figure pending storage in the first pending storage display area 5D or the like. Command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number in the second reserved storage display area 5U or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

10-17 are explanatory diagrams illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-17, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the variation pattern determination Numerical data representing the random number MR3 for the normal figure display result determination and the random number MR4 for determining the result of the display of the general pattern are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby making one of the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating the part may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is used to determine the type of jackpot when the variable display result is "jackpot" to any one of "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "non-probable variable jackpot". It is a random number, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols and decorative symbols, for example, "1" to " 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of the display of the normal pattern is used to determine whether the variation display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the game of the normal pattern is "win" or "lose the normal pattern". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIGS. 10-18 show variation patterns in the characteristic portion 177SG of this embodiment. In the characterizing part 177SG of the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "losing", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach". In addition, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is a "big hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "losing" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), and variation A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "losing" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach-loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a "big hit variation pattern".

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach is executed, and a super reach in which the reach performance of the super reach such as super reach A, super reach B, super reach C, and super reach D is executed. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach A, normal reach B, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided as in the following. Also, as for the super reach variation pattern, five or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach E, super reach F, and so on may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 10-18, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of the normal reach in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation pattern. In addition, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach A to super reach D in the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach production of super reach D is executed. The variation pattern with the longest special figure variation time is set, followed by the variation pattern in which the super reach C super reach effect is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach B super reach effect is executed, and the super reach A The special figure fluctuation time is set long in order of the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production is executed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 177SG of the present embodiment, it is set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes high in the order of super reach D, super reach C, super reach B, super reach A, and normal reach. Therefore, in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of the big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Note that both the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach C is executed and the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach D is executed in the characterizing portion 177SG of the present embodiment are the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R during the variable display. is a variation pattern that operates (moves) from the origin position toward the combined position, but the variation pattern in which the super reach C super reach effect is executed may be selected only during time saving control (high base). While it is a variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the super reach D effect is executed is a variation pattern that may be selected regardless of whether or not the time reduction control is being performed.

Furthermore, the variation pattern of super reach C is a variation pattern in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position toward the combined position while the push button 31B is being operated. This is a variation pattern in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position toward the combined position regardless of the operation of the push button 31B (see FIG. 10-28). In addition, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of Super Reach C exemplifies a form that is selected only during time saving control (high base), but the present invention is not limited to this Instead, there may be a case where the variation pattern of super reach C is selected during the normal state (low base).

Furthermore, in the characterizing portion 177SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-18, when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach D is executed, the variable display result is lost. In other words, when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach D is executed, the variable display result always becomes a big hit. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a case where the variable display result is a failure even when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern in which the super ready-to-win effect of super reach D is executed. .

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data, table data, etc. used to control the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals, which are various control commands, from the main substrate 11, and a plurality of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIGS. Table data constituting a variation pattern table for storing types and the like are stored.

10-19 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In the characterizing portion 177SG of the present embodiment, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table is a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 177SG4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 177SG4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a "jackpot" and to the jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for judging the special symbol display result. is a table.

In the display result determination table of the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state) , a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "losing".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big win" to the big win game state. It is data for judgment to be assigned. In the display result determination table of the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state (low probability state) , is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (about 1/300 in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit gaming state becomes higher (this embodiment about 1/30 for the morphological feature 177SG). That is, in the display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or the time-saving state is higher. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so as to increase.

FIG. 10-20 shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment determines the jackpot type determination table based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. It is a table referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variation display (fluctuation) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 177SG4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol Depending on whether it is a special game by the symbol display device 177SG4B), the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for judging the jackpot type is “non-probability variable”, “probability variable jackpot A”, “probability variable jackpot B ” are assigned to multiple types of jackpot types.

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 177SG of the present embodiment with reference to FIG. High-probability control and time-saving control are executed to shift to a high-probability-high base state, and probability variable jackpot A and probability-variable jackpot B are executed, and only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state is ended to shift to a low-probability-high base state. A non-probable variable jackpot is set.

In the big-hit game state by "probability-variable big win A" and the big-hit game state by "non-probability variable big win", as described above, 16 rounds (so-called 16 rounds), which is a repetitive normal open jackpot. On the other hand, in the jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot B", as described above, the rounds for changing the special variable winning ball device 177SG7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated five times (so-called five rounds). It is a short-term open jackpot. Therefore, the "variable probability big hit A" may be called a 16 round (16R) variable probability big hit, and the "variable probability big hit B" may be called a 5 round (5R) probability variable big hit.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the variable probability big win A and the variable probability big win B are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the regenerated big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature part 177SG of the present embodiment) that the special figure game is executed, or the predetermined The game is terminated by entering a big win game state before the special game is executed for the number of times.

In the setting example of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 10-20 (A), depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable big hit A" and "variable big hit B" Assignment of the judgment value for each jackpot type is different. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, no determination value is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 177SG4A. When the second special symbol display device 177SG4B is used to start the special symbol game using the second special symbol When determining the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable jackpot B" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in a special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the jackpot type to a short-term open jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probability variable jackpot B", for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which few winning balls are obtained is avoided, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-20 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probable variation" jackpot type is the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether the variable special is the first special or the second special. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, according to the allocation of the determination value for the "probability variable jackpot B", depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable probability big hit A ” also differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The case is set to be easier to determine than the case of the first special figure.

In addition, even if the variable special figure is the second special figure, the judgment value of a predetermined range different from the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". may For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than when the variable special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the "probability variable jackpot B" jackpot type. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the common table data may be referenced to determine the jackpot type.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is decided in advance that the special figure display result will be "big hit", and the special figure display result will be "losing" A change pattern determination table for failure, which is used when it is determined in advance to do, is prepared in advance.

In the big hit variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern of the normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach A big hit (PB1-2), the variation pattern of the super reach B big hit (PB1-3), and the super reach D For each variation pattern of the big hit variation patterns (PB1-5), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value. In the big hit variation pattern determination table B, the variation pattern of the normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach A big hit (PB1-2), the variation pattern of the super reach B big hit (PB1-3), and the time saving control Predetermined random number values within the possible range of random number values MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned as judgment values to each variation pattern of the super reach C big hit variation patterns (PB1-4) corresponding to . In addition, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when the type of the jackpot is "probability variable jackpot A" or "probability variable jackpot B", super reach B is likely to be determined, and the jackpot type is In the case of the "non-probable variable big hit", the super reach A is assigned so as to be easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach B is executed, the "variable variable big win A" or the "variable big win B". It is possible to increase the player's expectation that it will be.

In addition, the change pattern determination table for loss is used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less, and the change pattern decision table A for loss is used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4. Loss variation pattern determination table B, loss variation pattern determination table C used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8, and when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed A fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss used in the above is prepared in advance.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss A, non-shortening non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), super reach A loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), super reach A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a judgment value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of B failure. In addition, in the change pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the change pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super reach A predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern of A loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach B loss (PA2-3) is assigned as a judgment value. ing. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss C, the fluctuation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super reach A predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern of A loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach B loss (PA2-3) is assigned as a judgment value. ing. In addition, in the loss variation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the super reach A loss ( PA2-2), Super Reach B loss variation pattern (PA2-3), Super Reach C loss variation pattern (PA2-4). Numerical values are assigned as judgment values.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-18, the fluctuation time of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the fluctuation pattern (PA1 -2) The variation pattern (PA1-3) of non-reach loss has a shorter variation time. Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach-losing variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally winning a starting prize makes it difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not stored in pending memory, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, a non-reach-losing fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time and no reduction ( By determining PA1-1), the time for the variable display is lengthened, and thus it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

Next, operation|movement of the production|presentation control board 12 in the characteristic part 177SG of this Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 10-21 is a flow chart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. FIG. When the power is turned on, the performance control CPU 120 first clears the RAM area, sets various initial values, and initializes a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the performance control. A first initialization process (177SGS050) and a second initialization process (177SGS051) for returning the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position and checking the operation are performed, and the processes of S73 to S77 shown in FIG. Run.

Here, the second initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23. FIG. 10-22 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing operation modes of non-detection operation control, detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. 10-23, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the detection time operation control, (C) is the non-detection time operation control FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing control speed;

As shown in FIG. 10-22, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are provided so as to be capable of reciprocating motion between an origin position (first position) and a combined position (second position). The forward motion to (second position) and the return motion from the united position to the origin position are performed by the performance control CPU 120 executing performance accessory operation processing and performance accessory storage processing, which will be described later. This is the actual operation mode.

If the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are not detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when the second initialization process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 detects the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 for some reason (for example, transportation or If the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302L, 177SG302L, 177SG302L, 177SG302L, 177SG302L, 177SG302L, 177SG302L, 177SG302L, 177SG302L, 177SG302L, 177SG302L, 177SG302L, 177SG302L, 177SG302L, 177SG302L, 177SG302L and 177SG302 (e.g., when a movable object cannot be confirmed to return to its origin or cannot move), or when it moves from the origin position due to vibration of the game machine, etc.). If it is at a predetermined position between the origin position and the combined position (such as the position indicated by the black circle corresponding to the non-detection operation control in FIG. 10-22), the non-detection operation control for returning to the origin is executed. Since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are located away from the origin position when the non-detection operation control is executed, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are only moved in the direction of the origin position.

Moreover, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when the second initialization process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes detection operation control.

For example, in order to ensure that the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401, the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 from the time when the detected portions are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 toward the origin positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 is determined. In cases such as when a predetermined operable range (for example, play) is set before the movement is restricted, the position detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 after returning to the origin is shifted further to the back side. It may stop in position. Therefore, even if the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, the operation control at the time of detection is performed to return the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 to more accurate origin positions.

In this detection operation control, it is necessary to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 to a position away from the origin position and then return to the origin position in order to temporarily cancel the detection state of the detection target portion by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. Since it is not necessary to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the combination position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position to the detection operation position near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating motion is performed at a distance shorter than the actual motion.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after executing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control in the second initialization process. The motion control for confirming the actual motion is the same motion as the actual motion that is actually performed in the performance using the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R (movable body performance, etc., which will be described later).

Next, the control speeds set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. 10-23(A), 10-23(B), and 10-23(C) are controlled by the production control CPU 120 to operate the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. It is the speed, which is different from the actual operating speed of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. That is, for example, when the predetermined movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated, even if the same control speed is set for one movement section and another movement section between the origin position and the united position, the one movement section and other movement sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when moving up and down in the same movement section, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R The actual operating speed may differ from the control speed. Further, even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, if there are differences in the size, weight, operation mode, movement distance, drive mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, each movable body 177SG302L , 177SG302R are not necessarily the same. When a plurality of movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated by stepping motors of the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 177SG302L and 177SG302R, the size, weight, If there are differences in operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc., the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not always the same.

As shown in FIG. 10-23(A), when executing the actual operation confirmation operation control, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer in the set actual operation confirmation process data. The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed to accelerate from the origin position, decelerate, and stop at the combined position, and accelerate from the combined position, decelerate, and stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R can operate normally, a speed priority mode (moving motors 177SG391L, 177SG391L, In this mode, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can be moved at high speed (maximum speed) in exchange for the small torque of 177SG391R (see FIG. 10-27). change. That is, when executing the production of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, the production control CPU 120 has the lowest speed (low speed) as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed higher than the lowest speed. (high speed), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are controlled to operate at speeds within the range of (high speed) and (high speed). Each movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as a second speed higher than the minimum speed.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, and the control speed is adjusted so as to achieve the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speeds. will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated based on the lowest control speed, they are operated at the lowest speed, and when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated based on the maximum control speed, they are operated at the maximum speed. It will be explained assuming that

Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed during acceleration and deceleration of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. Further, when returning to the origin position after moving to the combined position, the movable body 177SG302L, the movable body 177SG302L, and the movable body 177SG302L are controlled to be at the lowest speed in the operation control for confirming actual operation for a longer time than when stopped at the combined position. After the 177SG302R is decelerated without fail, the origin detection sensor 177SG401 detects the detected portion.

As shown in FIG. 10-23(B), the effect control CPU 120, when executing the motion control at the time of detection, during the period of movement from the origin position to the united position and the period of movement from the united position to the origin position, which will be described later. As a torque priority mode (a mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved at a low speed (lowest speed) instead of the torque of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R being large, see FIG. 10-27), the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation is always set. The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are controlled to operate at the (first speed). That is, the performance control CPU 120 has the maximum speed in the detection time operation control as the first operation control, the speed below the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment Then, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are always controlled based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the operation control for actual operation confirmation so that the speed is the same as the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. Control to operate.

In addition, in the case of motion control at the time of detection, since the motion distance of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is shorter than that in the motion control for confirming actual motion, if the control speed is accelerated in the motion control for verifying actual motion, that is, the motion is performed at a high speed. , the origin detection sensor 177SG401 cannot reliably detect the part to be detected, or the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R, etc. are damaged by the impact when the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R return to the origin position from a short distance and the movement is restricted. Since there is a possibility that the motor may be damaged, the motor is controlled to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (C), the effect control CPU 120, when executing the non-detection operation control, during the period of moving from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the united position to the origin position , as a torque priority mode (see FIG. 10-27), which will be described later, is controlled to always operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU120, the maximum speed in the non-detection time operation control as the first operation control (maximum operation speed) is the speed below the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation as the second operation control (this implementation In the characteristic part 177SG in the form of, the lowest control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control is always set so that the speed is the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Control is performed to operate the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R.

In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are from the origin position, if the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are positioned near the origin position, in the operation control for confirming the actual operation, When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302L return to the origin position, the origin detection sensor 177SG401 cannot reliably detect the detected part, or the movable body 177SG302L cannot be reliably detected from a short distance. , 177SG302R return to the origin position and the movement is restricted, the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R, etc. may be damaged. .

As described above, in the characterizing portion 117SG of the present embodiment, in the second initialization process, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved at high speed (maximum speed) in spite of the small torque of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R. By executing the actual operation confirmation operation control in the speed priority mode, the actual operation confirmation operation control can be completed quickly.

On the other hand, in the second initialization process, in the torque priority mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved at low speed (minimum speed) instead of the large torque of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R, the operation check operation control at the time of detection or non-detection is performed. By executing the time operation control, it is possible to obtain torque larger than the torque required for the rotation of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R when moving toward the origin position. The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can be reliably moved to the origin position while preventing them from stopping without rotating on the way.

FIG. 10-24 is a flow chart showing an example of effect processing during variable display in FIG. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the values of the process timer, the variable time timer, and the variable control timer by -1 (177SGS301, 177SGS302, 177SGS303). These process timer, variable time timer, and variable control timer are values set in the variable display start setting process in FIG. 7 in order to execute effects during variable display.

At 177SG304, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (177SGS305). That is, in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 7, the process timer is set to the next process timer set value in the process table set according to the variation pattern of the variable display to be executed. Start again (177SGS306). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (177SGS307). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (for performance component) is executed (177SGS308).

After the execution of 177SGS307 or 177SGS308, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the process data being executed is the process data of super reach C, that is, whether the fluctuation display is being executed in the fluctuation pattern of super reach C. (177SGS310). If the process data being executed is not super reach C process data (177SGS310; N), proceed to 177SGS321; if the process data being executed is super reach C process data (177SGS310; Y), move body 177SG302L , 177SG302R from the origin position toward the combined position is determined (177SGS311).

When it is time to start accepting the operation of the push button 31B (177SGS311; Y), the image display device 5 displays a push button operation prompting image 177SGZ1 (FIG. 10-30(A)) prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. (see 177SGS312) and go to 177SGS313. If it is not the time to start accepting the operation of the push button 31B (177SGS311; N), the process proceeds to 177SGS313 without executing the process of 177SGS312.

At 177SGS313, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the push button 31B is in the operation accepting period (177SGS313). If it is during the push button 31B operation acceptance period (177SGS313; Y), the production role product operation processing for operating the role products (movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R) is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B (177SGS314). ), go to 177SGS320.

Also, if it is not during the push button 31B operation acceptance period (177SGS313; N), it is determined whether or not it is time to finish accepting the operation of the push button 31B (177SGS315). When it is time to finish accepting the operation of the push button 31B (177SGS315; Y), the display of the push button operation prompting image 177SGZ1 on the image display device 5 is finished (177SGS316), and a role product action start flag, which will be described later, is set. If so, clear the accessory action started flag (177SGS317) and proceed to 177SGS318.

If it is not the push button 31B operation reception end timing (177SGS315; N) at 177SGS315, the process proceeds to 177SGS318 without executing the processes of 177SGS316 and 177SGS317.

Then, at 177SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the end timing of accepting the operation of the push button 31B has passed (177SGS318). If the push button 31B operation reception end timing has not passed (177SGS318; N), the process proceeds to 177SGS321, and if the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B has passed (177SGS318; Y), the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is further processed. is ON, that is, whether or not the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 (177SGS319).

If the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON (177SGS319; Y), proceed to 177SGS321. (177SGS320) and proceeds to 177SGS321.

At 177SGS321, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation control timer has timed out (177SGS321). When the variation control timer has timed out (177SGS321; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have passed since the previous display switching of the decorative patterns). (177SGS322). Thus, in the image display device 5, variation control of decorative symbols is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Also, the variable control timer is reset to a predetermined value (177SGS323).

Also, when the variation control timer has not timed out (177SGS321; N), after executing 177SGS323, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variation time timer has timed out (177SGS324). If the variable time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (S173) (177SGS326). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command is received is set (177SGS325; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is waited for per special figure ( S173) is updated (177SGS326). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control will be shifted to stop the fluctuation. Even if it is received, the variation of the decorative design can be terminated when the normal variation time has elapsed (when the special design finishes varying).

In addition, the process data during the variable display of the decorative design is set in the process table used for the variation control of the decorative design. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the fluctuation time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the processing of 177SGS304, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the decorative design effect control based on the process table ends. do.

FIG. 10-25 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect accessory operation process in the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 10-24. In the effect accessory operation process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the push button 31B is operated (177SGS331). If there is an operation of the push button 31B (177SGS331; Y), it is further determined whether or not a character object in-operation flag indicating that the character objects (movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R) are in operation is set (177SGS332). ). When the role product in-operation flag is not set (177SGS332; N), it is determined whether the union detection sensor 177SG402 is ON, that is, whether the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R have moved to the union position. Judge (177SGS333).

When the union detection sensor 177SG402 is ON (177SGS333; Y), the performance accessory operation process is terminated. is not completed, the role product operation start flag indicating that the operation of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R has started even once during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. is set (177SGS334).

When the accessory operation start completion flag is not set (177SGS334; N), it starts outputting operation instructions in the speed priority mode to the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS335). Also, a role product action start completion flag and a role product in-operation flag indicating that the role products (movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R) are in operation are set, and the performance role product operation processing is terminated (177SGS336, 177SG337).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-27, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment reduce the torque in response to the operation instruction from the effect control CPU 120, while the movable bodies 177SG302L, A speed priority mode in which the 177SG302R can be moved at high speed and with a low biasing force, and a torque priority mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved at a low speed and with a high biasing force compared to the speed priority mode, while torque can be increased more than in the speed priority mode. It is possible to drive in mode and .

Returning to FIG. 10-25, when the accessory action start flag is set in 177SGS334 (177SGS334; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON, that is, at least once Although the operation of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R was started based on the operation of the push button 31B, the operation of the push button 31B was not continuously executed. A determination is made as to whether or not there is almost no movement (177SGS338).

When the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON (177SGS338; Y), it means that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are positioned near the origin position, that is, they are rotating (Fig. 10-12 to FIG. 10-13), start outputting an operation instruction in the speed priority mode to the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS335). , set the accessory action started flag and proceed to 177SGS337 (177SGS336). On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is OFF (177SG338; N), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are separated from the origin position, that is, they rotate ( 10-12 to 10-13), based on the possibility that it may not be possible to obtain sufficient acceleration for moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R, an operation instruction in the torque priority mode is output. Start (177SGS339), set the flag during operation of the role product, and end the production role product operation processing (177SGS337).

In addition, when the character object in operation flag is set in 177SGS332 (177SGS332; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the union detection sensor 177SG402 is ON, that is, the union position of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. is complete (177SGS340). When the union detection sensor 177SG402 is OFF (177SGS340; N), by ending the effect accessory operation processing, the output of the operation instruction in the speed priority mode or the operation instruction in the torque priority mode to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is continued. Then, the operations of the movable bodies 177SGS302L and 177SGS302R are continued. When the combination detection sensor 177SG402 is ON (177SGS340; Y), a stop instruction is output to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R to stop driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS342). Clear the flag during operation of the role product (177SGS343), and end the production role product operation processing.

When there is no operation of the push button 31B at 177SGS331 (177SGS331; N), it is determined whether or not the flag during operation of the accessory is set (177SGS341). When the accessory in operation flag is set (177SGS341; Y), that is, when the operation of the push button 31B ends during the operation of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, a stop instruction is given to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R. is output to stop driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS342), clear the flag during operation of the role product (177SGS343), and end the production role product operation processing.

In the characterizing part 177SG of the present embodiment, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the united position in the production accessory action process, it is determined whether or not the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON. Based on the positions where the bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged, the drive mode for driving the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance accessory operation is performed. In the processing, the driving modes for driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are differentiated based on the number of times the push button 31B is operated during the operation accepting period of the push button 31B (for example, when the push button 31B is operated for the first time, drive the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode, and when the push button 31B is operated for the second time or later, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be driven in the torque priority mode. .

FIG. 10-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect accessory storing process in the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 10-24. In the performance accessory storage process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the role product in-operation flag is set (177SGS351). When the accessory in operation flag is set (177SGS351; Y), the drive of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is stopped by outputting a stop instruction to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS370), Clear the flag during operation of the role product (177SGS371), and terminate the production role product storage processing.

Further, when the role object in operation flag is not set (177SGS351; N), whether or not the role object storage flag indicating that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moving toward the origin position is set. (177SGS352). If the character object storage flag is not set (177SGS352; N), that is, if the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not yet moving toward the origin position, the character object (movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R) is stored (origin It is determined whether or not it is in the period of starting movement toward a position (177SGS353).

If it is outside the period for starting the storing of the role (177SGS353; N), the production role storing process is terminated. It is determined whether or not it is ON, that is, whether or not the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the combined position (177SGS354). When the combination detection sensor 177SG402 is ON, it is possible to obtain sufficient acceleration for rotating (see FIGS. 10-12 to 10-13) when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move from the combination position to the origin position. Based on what can be done, an operation instruction in the speed priority mode is output to the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS355), and the performance accessory storing process is finished by setting the accessory storing flag (177SGS357).

In addition, when the combination detection sensor 177SG402 is OFF in 177SGS354 (177SGS354; N), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not arranged at the combination position, and therefore rotate when moving to the origin position (FIGS. 10-12 to 10-12). 10-13), an operation instruction in the torque priority mode is output to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS356), and the accessory is being stored. A flag is set and the effect accessory storage processing is terminated (177SGS357).

Further, when the accessory storage flag is set in 177SGS352 (177SGS352; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON, that is, whether the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move to the origin position. is completed (177SGS360). When the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON, that is, when the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position is completed (177SGS360; Y), a stop instruction is output to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R. The driving of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is stopped (177SGS361), the character object storage flag is cleared (177SGS362), and the performance character object storage processing is terminated.

When the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is OFF, that is, when the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position is not completed (177SGS360; N), the processing of 177SGS361 and 177SGS362 is not executed, Terminate the object storage process.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 177SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-28, in the case of executing the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach C, during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R operate (move) from the origin position toward the combined position when the player continuously operates (for example, long presses) the push button 31B.

It should be noted that when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move toward the combined position during the variation display in the variation pattern of Super Reach C, the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is the initial movement (the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the origin position). ) or a re-operation with the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R placed at the origin position or the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. However, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are placed at a position different from the origin position (non-origin position), the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode. there is

That is, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move toward the combined position during the variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach C, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode based on the operation of the push button 31B. When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move out of the origin position by (when the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move out of the detection range of the origin detection sensor 177SG401), as shown in FIG. 10-29(A) When the push button 31B is operated again, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode. 10-12 to 10-13), the operation is prevented from being stopped. In addition, when the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode based on the operation of the push button 31B, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R hardly move from the origin position (detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R cannot detect the origin). When the sensor 177SG401 does not move outside the detection range of the sensor 177SG401), as shown in FIG. , so that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can obtain sufficient acceleration to rotate (see FIGS. 10-12 to 10-13) while moving from the origin position toward the combined position. It's becoming

When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move toward the origin position during the variation display in the variation pattern of super reach C, as shown in FIG. In other words, control by operating the push button 31B is disabled. Further, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the combined position (second position) when starting the operation, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode, and when the operation is started, When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at a position (non-combined position) different from the combined position (second position), the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode.

In the characterizing part 177SG of the present embodiment, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move to the united position by operating the push button 31B once and then operating it again during the period when the operation of the push button 31B is accepted. Although the mode of restarting is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. 31B until the end of the operation acceptance period is longer than the period until the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move to the combined position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the combined position based on the second operation of the push button 31B. You may not operate toward .

Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when the push button 31B is operated again in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are positioned at the origin position, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are switched to the speed priority mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the push button 31B is operated again, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are always driven by the moving motors regardless of the origin position. The 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be driven in the torque priority mode. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the effect control CPU 120 in the effect accessory operation process and reduce the data capacity required for the effect accessory operation process.

On the other hand, in the variation display in the variation pattern of super reach D, as in the variation display in the variation pattern of super reach C, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move from the origin position to the combined position and move from the combined position to the origin position. 10-28, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R, as shown in FIG. It is designed to be driven by mode. In the characterizing part 177SG of the present embodiment, in the case of the variation pattern of super reach D, the drive mode of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is changed regardless of the operation of the push button 31B, that is, Since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R do not stop during the operation, a single speed priority mode is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. When moving toward the united position, the motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in advance speed priority mode, and when moving from the united position toward the origin position, advance speed priority mode is used. The movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be driven in the evacuation speed priority mode with different movement speeds (for example, the movement speed is fast).

Further, in the case of the variation pattern of super reach D, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated regardless of the operation of the push button 31B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Only the operation of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R may be started according to the operation of the push button 31B.

In addition, in the characterizing part 177SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R regardless of the operation of the push button 31B is illustrated as super reach D only. The variation pattern for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R regardless of the operation of these push buttons 31B may be set to, for example, a normal reach variation pattern, or a variation pattern other than super reach D. Other super reach, for example super reach E, may be set. In this way, if the variation pattern for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R regardless of the operation of the push button 31B is also set to the variation pattern for the normal reach, which is expected to result in a bigger hit than the super reach D, the super The movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be driven in the speed priority mode for normal reach, in which the movement speed is different from the speed priority mode for reach D (for example, the movement speed is slow). In addition, even when super reach E, which has a lower expectation of big hit than super reach D, is set as a variation pattern for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R regardless of the operation of the push button 31B, the speed priority mode of super reach D is set. The moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be driven in the speed priority mode for super reach E, which has a different moving speed (for example, the moving speed is slow). In other words, as the speed priority mode, a plurality of speed priority modes with different moving speeds are also provided, and these speed priority modes are selected from the positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R (origin position, combined position) and the variation pattern (big hit expectation). You may make it use properly according to.

In addition, in the production accessory storage processing in the characterizing part 177SG of the present embodiment, when moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R toward the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. Although there is a case where it is driven in the torque priority mode, the present invention is not limited to this. The moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may always be driven in the torque priority mode. By doing so, for example, when a power failure occurs while moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R toward the origin position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moving to the origin position after the power failure is restored. 10-12 and 10-13), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can be reliably moved to the origin position.

Next, an example of movable body effects by the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R of the effect device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-30 and 10-31.

For example, at a predetermined timing after the variable display of decorative symbols based on the variation pattern of super ready-to-win C is started and the ready-to-win is established and develops to super ready-to-win, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. In this manner, the push button operation prompting image 177SGZ1 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(B), the effect control CPU 120 moves the moving body 177SG310 by the lifting motor 177SG305 based on the operation of the push button 31B within the operation acceptance period, thereby moving the moving body 177SG310 to the left and right. The bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R simultaneously start moving from the first position (origin position) to the second position (combined position), and the rotation motor 177SG367 moves the rotation portion 177SG330B from the first projecting position to the accommodation position, The movable portion 177SG330 changes from the first state to the second state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-30(C), in the variable display based on the variation pattern of the super reach C, if the operation of the push button 31B is once canceled during the operation accepting period of the push button 31B, the movable Movement of bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R from the first position (origin position) to the second position (merged position) is interrupted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (D), when the push button 31B is continuously operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B or when the operation of the push button 31B is restarted, D) and as shown in FIG. 10-30(E), the peripheral walls 177SG322E and 177SG322F of the guided member 177SG320 come into contact with the contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B, and the moving body 177SG310 moves while maintaining the contact state. As a result, the movable portion 177SG330 rotates about 180 degrees about the vertical rotation shaft 177SG311.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-30(E), the left and right movable portions 177SG330, which are each inverted by about 180 degrees at the second position (combined position), abut and unite, and the rotating portion 177SG330B rotates. It stops at the second projecting position. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(F), the effect control CPU 120 raises the movable rail 177SG351 by the elevation motor 177SG305, thereby raising the movable portion 177SG330 relative to the pedestal 177SG331. The effect image 177SGZ2 is displayed around the movable portion 177SG330 on the display screen of . After that, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are returned from the second position to the first position, and the image display device 5 derives and displays the decorative symbols in combination of the big hits. Incidentally, when the variation pattern of the variation display is the variation pattern of Super Reach C Loss, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to just before the second position shown in FIG. 10-30(E), and then returned to the first position. Then, on the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are derived and displayed in combination of the losing ones.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-30(A), when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are in the first position (origin position) separated from each other to the left and right, the front cover 177SG333 and the frame body cover 177SG370L of the left movable body 177SG302L are A first left rendering portion imitating the right half of an airplane is formed by the above, and a first right imitating the left half of an airplane is formed by the front cover 177SG333 of the right movable body 177SG302R and the frame body cover 177SG370R. A directing department is formed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-30(E) and 10-30(F), when they are in the second position (merged position) where they abut or approach each other, the left movable body 177SG302L rear cover 177SG334 and the right side movable body 177SG302L. The rear cover 177SG334 of the movable body 177SG302R and the rear cover 177SG334 are arranged side by side on the left and right and united to form a second effect part that imitates the entire airplane.

Thus, at the first position, the front surfaces of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R and the frame body covers 177SG370L and 177SG370R constitute the first left effect section and the first right effect section. The back of the 177SG302R constitutes a second rendering section different from the first rendering section. More specifically, the first left rendering section and the first right rendering section are rendering sections that can specify approximately two-thirds of the aircraft body, while the second rendering section is a rendering section that can specify the entire aircraft body. be.

In other words, the first left effect portion and the first right effect portion, which were separately located at the left and right positions at the first position, are partially moved and combined to form one second effect portion. It can give you surprises. Further, by making the size of the airplane, which is the second effect section, larger than the size of the airplane, which is the first left effect part and the first right effect part, it is possible to give more surprise.

Further, for example, when the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. When an effect suggesting movement is performed, or when the left and right movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are combined as shown in FIG. It is also possible to perform a definite effect of announcing a big hit by letting the player run. 10-30(A) to 10-30(F), for example, the left and right movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved as a forewarning effect suggesting that the super reach effect may be performed. A movable body effect such as reciprocating movement between the 1st position and a position before the 3rd position may be executed.

Further, for example, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are positioned at the first position as shown in FIG. Thus, the sense of unity between the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R and the frame covers 177SG370L and 177SG370R can be improved, while the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move from the first position toward the second position to close the frame cover 177SG370L. , 177SG370R, the separation between the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R and the frame covers 177SG370L and 177SG370R can be made inconspicuous by turning off the movable LED 177SG338F.

In addition, when the variation display of the decoration pattern based on the variation pattern of super reach D is started, and reach is established, as shown in FIG. be.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-31(B) and 10-31(C), the moving body 177SG310 is moved by the lifting motor 177SG305 based on the progress of the reach effect of the super reach D, thereby moving the moving body 177SG310 to the left and right. The bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R simultaneously start moving from the first position (origin position) to the second position (combined position), and the rotation motor 177SG367 moves the rotation portion 177SG330B from the first projecting position to the accommodation position, The movable portion 177SG330 changes from the first state to the second state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31(D), by further executing the reach performance of super reach D, the peripheral walls 177SG322E and 177SG322F of the guided member 177SG320 come into contact with the contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B, and the corresponding contact is made. By moving the moving body 177SG310 while maintaining this state, the movable portion 177SG330 rotates about 180 degrees around the rotating shaft 177SG311 directed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-31(E), the left and right movable portions 177SG330, which are each inverted by about 180 degrees at the second position (combined position), come into contact and unite, and the rotating portion 177SG330B rotates. It stops at the second projecting position. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31(F), the effect control CPU 120 raises the movable rail 177SG351 by the elevation motor 177SG305, thereby raising the movable portion 177SG330 relative to the pedestal 177SG331. The effect image 177SGZ2 is displayed around the movable portion 177SG330 on the display screen of . After that, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are returned from the second position to the first position, and the image display device 5 derives and displays the decorative symbols in combination of the big hits.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (first 2 position), and when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin position, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are activated. By driving in the speed priority mode, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated at high speed and with a low biasing force. By driving the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the torque priority mode to operate the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R at a low speed and with a high biasing force, the rendering effect in the movable body rendering can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 177SG of the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which the movable object effect can be executed by the player's operation of the push button 31B during the reach effect of the super reach C, but the present invention is based on this. It is not limited to this, and during the ready-to-win effect of super reach C, the movable body effect may be executed by the player's operation of operating means other than the push button 31B (for example, the stick controller 31A, etc.).

In addition, as a movable body presentation, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are directed to the combined position at high speed and with a low biasing force. while the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not located at the origin position, that is, the operation of the push button 31B is released after the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R once start moving toward the combined position. When the push button 31B is operated again after stopping by , and the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the combined position is resumed, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the combined position at low speed and with a high biasing force. Therefore, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are first moved from the origin position toward the combined position, and when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are restarted toward the combined position, the movements of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are different. Since the modes are different, the rendering effect of the movable body rendering can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-30(C) to 10-30(D), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R rotate in the process of moving from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position). As a result, unexpectedness can be imparted to the movable body presentation, and the game interest of the movable body presentation can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 177SG of the present embodiment, as the movable body presentation, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R rotate in the process of moving from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position). However, the present invention is not limited to this. , may move in a direction other than the combined position, or simply move from the origin position to the combined position.

Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, in the second initialization process (177SGS051), if the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401, non-detection After the hour operation control is executed, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode to execute the actual operation confirmation operation, and the origin detection sensor 177SG401 detects the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. In this case, after the detection operation control is executed, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode to execute the actual operation confirmation operation. Since the actual operation confirmation operation is executed by driving the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode regardless of whether or not the detected portion of the 177SG302R is detected, the processing related to the actual operation confirmation operation is simplified. can be

Further, in the characterizing part 177SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. When the retraction operation of the present invention is executed), the driving modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are changed according to the positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R when the retraction operation is started, that is, the retraction operation is started. Although the mode of operation of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is changed according to the positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R when the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the origin position (first position) during the reach performance of the reach C (when the evacuation operation in the present invention is executed), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin position (first position). position) toward the combined position (second position) (when the advancing operation in the present invention is executed), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin position ( 1st position), the driving modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are varied (that is, according to the speed of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the combined position, , the speeds of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R when moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R from the combined position toward the origin position may be varied.

Furthermore, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the origin position (first position) during the reach performance of Super Reach C (when the retraction operation in the present invention is executed), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin position. Regardless of the driving mode of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R when moving from the (first position) toward the combined position (second position) (when the advance operation in the present invention is executed), the moving motor 177SG391L is always used. , 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode (that is, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the origin position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are always moved at high speed and with a low biasing force). good. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the processing when moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R toward the origin position (first position).

In addition, the effect device 177SG300 in the characterizing portion 177SG of the present embodiment includes contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B in addition to the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located at the origin position (first position). to the combined position (second position) or from the combined position (second position) to the origin position (first position). By moving to the right or left while maintaining the state, the guided member 177SG320 rotates about 180 degrees, thereby changing the direction (posture) from forward (first posture) to backward (second posture). In other words, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R rotate while moving to change their orientation, so that the rendering effect of the movable body rendering can be enhanced.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the embodiment, in the normal state, time saving state, probability variable state, the advantage for the player (eg, jackpot probability) is constant, but the present invention is this For example, as a modification 177SG-2, a setting means capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of setting values is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the setting means is set The degree of advantage (for example, the probability of a big hit) for the player may differ according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process (see FIG. 5), the CPU 103 selects a display result determination table with different ranges of the determination value (MR1) assigned to the big hit according to the set value, It is only necessary to determine whether or not the variable display result is a big hit.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 in which the set values can be set in this way, the CPU 103 can change the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 on the condition that the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on. It is only necessary to make it controllable to a state (change permission state).

In this way, when the CPU 103 can control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the change permission state on the condition that the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, as a modification 177SG-3, the effect control CPU 120 By executing the second initialization process (FIG. 10-21) in the change permitted state, the non-detection time operation control and the like may be executed. In this manner, when the change permission state is set, the non-detection operation control for returning the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position (first position) is executed, so that there is no hindrance to the setting value change operation. can be prevented from occurring.

Further, in this way, when the CPU 103 can control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the change permission state on the condition that the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, as a modification 177SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 , When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the change permission state is not controlled by the CPU 103, the second initialization process (FIG. 10-21) is executed to execute the non-detection operation control. , when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on and the change permission state is controlled by the CPU 103, the second initialization process (FIG. 10-21) is not executed and the non-detection time operation control is not executed. can be By doing so, the non-detection operation for returning the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position (first position) is not executed in the change permission state, so that the setting value change operation is not hindered. can be prevented.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the setting value can be set in this way, as a modification 177SG-3, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 103 sets the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the set value. Can be controlled to a state that can be changed, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the second initialization process (see FIG. 10-21) to perform non-detection automatic control, detection time operation control, actual operation confirmation operation control should be executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of the super reach C, the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are detected when the player operates the push button 31B again. has not departed from the detection range of the origin detection sensor 177SG401, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach C When the player operates the push button 31B again when the movable object effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect, whether or not the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are out of the detection range of the origin detection sensor 177SG401. Regardless, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may always be driven in the torque priority mode. In other words, in this case, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position) at low speed and with a high biasing force. Therefore, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is set to be longer than the period during which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position) at low speed and with a high biasing force. It is desirable to

Further, in the characterizing portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of Super Reach C, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin position (first position) according to the operation of the push button 31B. to the combined position (second position), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved according to whether or not the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A sensor capable of detecting the detected part is provided, and when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position (first position) toward the combined position (second position) in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B, the sensor The driving modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be differentiated depending on whether or not the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are detected by.

Further, in the characterizing portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of Super Reach C, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin position (first position) according to the operation of the push button 31B. to the combined position (second position), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved according to whether or not the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The period during which the push button 31B is operated is measured when moving toward the position (second position). The driving modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be changed accordingly.

Further, in the characterizing part 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when executing the movable object effect during the ready-to-win effect of Super Reach C, the movable objects 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin position ( 1st position) toward the united position (second position). The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R may be moved from the origin position (first position) toward the combined position (second position) according to an operation (so-called lever grabber) or the like. It should be noted that when executing the movable body effect in this way, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position (first position) to the united position (first position) in response to repeated hits of the push button 31B and operations of the stick controller 31A in multiple directions. 2 position), the number of operations of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A when moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R from the origin position (first position) toward the combined position (second position), When the operation period or the like is measured and the push button 31B is operated again during the movable body presentation period, the driving modes of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be changed according to the number of operations and the operation period. .

Further, in the characterizing portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of Super Reach C, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin position (first position) according to the operation of the push button 31B. to the combined position (second position), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved according to whether or not the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. Although the motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R for movement have different drive modes, the present invention is not limited thereto. The driving modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R may be changed according to the determination result of whether or not the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are rotating by the sensor. .

Further, in the characterizing portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of Super Reach C, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin position (first position) according to the operation of the push button 31B. to the combined position (second position), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved according to whether or not the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. However, the present invention is not limited to this. and a moving motor for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R according to the determination result of whether or not the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are close to the contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B. The drive modes of 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be made different.

That is, in the "first situation" and the "second situation" of the present invention, the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, such as the characteristic portion 177SG of the above embodiment, are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. In addition to whether or not the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is operated, the number of operations and operation period of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R between the origin position (first position) and the combined position (second position), the movable body 177SG302L , 177SG302R are rotating, and whether the guided member 177SG320 is close to the contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B.

Further, in the characterizing part 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable object effect is executed during the reach effect of the super reach C, when the operation of the push button 31B is received, the origin detection sensor 177SG401 detects the movable objects 177SG302L and 177SG302R. If the detected portion is not detected, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are driven in the torque priority mode so that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are directed to the combined position (second position). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In other words, after the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R obtain the force for reliably rotating when moving toward the combined position (second position), the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. You may do so. By doing so, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can be reliably and quickly moved to the combined position.

Further, in the characterizing part 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable object effect is executed during the reach effect of the super reach C, when the operation of the push button 31B is received, the origin detection sensor 177SG401 detects the movable objects 177SG302L and 177SG302R. An embodiment has been exemplified in which the driving modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are determined to be different depending on the result of determination as to whether or not the detected portion is detected, but the present invention. is not limited to this. By driving the movement motor corresponding to the other movable body in the torque priority mode to move the other movable body to the origin position, and then driving both the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode. The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R may be moved from the origin position toward the combined position. Further, by driving the moving motor corresponding to the one movable body in the speed priority mode, the one movable body is moved from the origin position toward the combined position, and the moving motor corresponding to the other movable body is moved. The other movable body may be moved from the origin position toward the combined position by driving the motor in the torque priority mode.

In addition, in the characterizing part 177SG of the above-described embodiment, two movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are provided, and the form in which these movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated in the movable body presentation is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. The number of movable bodies that operate in the movable body presentation may be one or three or more.

Further, in the characterizing part 177SG of the above embodiment, the mode of executing the movable body production during the variable display was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body production is performed during the jackpot game. It may be executed as an effect for notifying that the probability variable state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game or as an effect for notifying that the jackpot game is a jackpot game of 16 lands.

Furthermore, in the characterizing portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R complete the movement from the first position (origin position) to the second position (combined position) during the variable display, the variable display result is a big hit. In other words, a form of executing a movable body effect as a jackpot notification effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body effect can be a chance-up effect during variable display, or It may be executed as an effect other than the big hit notification effect during the variable display, such as a development notification effect for notifying that it will develop into a reach effect of super reach.

Further, in the characterizing portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, as a moving object effect during the reach effect of the super reach C, when the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401, the push button When the operation of 31B is accepted, it is determined whether or not the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401, and the movement for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R according to the determination result. Although the embodiment in which the driving modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are made different is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the driving modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are made different according to the operation period of the push button 31B. That is, the moving speeds of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R toward the combined position may differ according to the operation period of the push button 31B.

In addition, in the characterizing part 177SG of the above-described embodiment, as the drive mode of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R, two drive modes, a speed priority mode and a torque priority mode, are exemplified. For example, the speed priority mode may be a plurality of speed priority modes of high speed, medium speed, and low speed, or the torque priority mode may be a plurality of torque priority modes of high torque, medium torque, and low torque. These multiple speed priority modes and multiple torque priority modes may be properly used depending on the situation. For example, when moving from the origin position based on the first operation of the push button 31B, a medium-speed speed priority mode is selected, and when the movement is from the origin position but not due to the first operation of the push button 31B, , a low-speed speed-priority mode may be set, and a high-speed speed-priority mode may be set for movement from the united position. The torque priority mode is also set to a high torque torque priority mode at the time of restarting operation by re-operating the push button 31B, and a middle torque torque priority mode from the time when the moving speed reaches the first speed after the operation start. Further, when the movement speed reaches the second speed, the low torque torque priority mode may be set.

Further, in the characterizing part 177SG of the above-described embodiment, the first operation mode of the present invention is a mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated at high speed and low torque in the speed priority mode (high-speed low-torque operation mode). The second operation mode of the invention is exemplified by a mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated at low speed and high torque in the torque priority mode (low speed high torque operation mode). is not limited to the difference in speed and torque, but the difference in the moving distance of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, the difference in the degree of change in the moving speed and the difference in the changing position (change pattern), and the difference in the moving speed. Differences in the ratio of the distance between the fast portion and the slow portion, the rotation of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, the presence or absence of expansion of the rotating portion 177SG330B, and the like may be included.

That is, if the moving distance of the movable body differs depending on the effect, that is, if the first situation and the second situation are different effects, and the moving distance of the movable body differs depending on the effect, the moving distance (effect ), the operation mode may be different. For example, when the movable body moves a short distance, the drive mode is set to a low speed so that the player can recognize the movement, and when the movable body moves a long distance, the performance is prevented from being delayed. The high-speed drive mode is used to enhance the performance effect, and conversely, the high-speed mode is used when the movable body vibrates due to repeated movement of the movable body over a short distance. While emphasizing that the movable body is vibrating, when the movable body is repeatedly operated at a distance longer than the repeated movement, the low speed mode is set to prevent the movable body from being damaged by the inertial force. good too.

In addition, even when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are stopped due to a power failure or an error while moving to the combined position, the operation mode of the movable bodies after stopping can be changed to the operation mode before stopping (for example, , speed priority mode) (for example, torque priority mode).

Further, in the characterizing portion 177SG of the above embodiment, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, which are the movable bodies of the present invention, are provided on the game board 2, but the present invention is limited to this. Alternatively, these movable bodies may be provided in the gaming machine frame 3 so that the player can touch them with a finger. From the standpoint of player protection, it is preferable to provide a safety function that stops the movement of the movable body when contact between the movable body and the player occurs, by providing a sensor or the like for detection. When the movable body is stopped by the safety function, the operation mode of the movable body after stopping is different from the operation mode before stopping (eg, high-speed mode) (e.g., low-speed mode). You may make it so.

In addition, as a movable body provided in the gaming machine frame 3, for example, in the case of a movable body projecting upward or obliquely upward from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player's operation is interrupted in the middle of the projecting motion. Therefore, even when the movable body stops, the motion mode of the movable body after stopping may be different from the motion mode before stopping.

Further, in the characterizing part 177SG of the above-described embodiment, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of the game machine. can be started, and a variable display result is derived to a display device capable of variable display of a plurality of identifiable patterns, one game ends, and the variable display result derived to the display device It can also be applied to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated accordingly.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 042SG)
FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area 042SG10 is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into this game area. In addition, the game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 042SG50 having a glass window 042SG50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the glass door frame 042SG50 can open and close the game area 042SG10. When the glass door frame 042SG50 is closed, the game area 042SG10 can be seen through the glass window 042SG50a.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, the game board 2 is made of translucent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, etc., and has a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. Nails (not shown), guide rails 042SG2b, and the like are provided. The game board 2 is made of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. may be configured

In addition, winning ball device 042SG6A, variable winning ball device 042SG6B, special variable winning ball device 042SG7, passage gate 042SG41, first special symbol display device 042SG4A, second special symbol display device 042SG4B, normal symbol display device 042SG20 in this characteristic part 042SG , first reservation display 042SG25A, second reservation display 042SG25B, normal drawing reservation display 042SG25C, center decorative frame 042SG51, image display device 5 (first reservation memory display area 042SG5D, second reservation memory display area 042SG5U, decorative pattern The display areas 042SG5L, 042SG5C, 042SG5R) are the winning ball device 177SG6A, the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, the special variable winning ball device 177SG7, the passage gate 177SG41, the first special symbol display device 177SG4A, and the second special symbol in the characteristic portion 177SG described above. Display device 177SG4B, normal pattern display 177SG20, first reservation display 177SG25A, second reservation display 177SG25B, general drawing reservation display 177SG25C, center decorative frame 177SG51, image display device 5 (first reservation storage display area 177SG5D, second 2 reserved memory display area 177SG5U, decorative pattern display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, 177SG5R), and description thereof will be omitted.

A first effect device 042SG300, a second effect device 042SG400, and a third effect device 042SG500 that operate according to effects are provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. Incidentally, the first effect device 042SG300 in the characteristic portion 042SG is a effect device having the same configuration as the effect body 177SG300 in the characteristic portion 177SG.

The first production device 042SG300 has movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R, the second production device 042SG400 has movable bodies 042SG401, and the third production device 042SG500 has movable bodies 042SG511, 042SG521L and 042SG521. 042SG302R, 042SG401, 042SG511, 042SG521L, and 042SG521R are movable between each standby position and effect position.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-3(A) and 11-3(B), the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R are arranged at left and right lateral positions of the image display device 5, which are standby positions when not in operation. During operation, it slides from the standby position to the front position of the image display device 5, which is the performance position.

In addition, the movable body 042SG401 is arranged above the image display device 5, which is the standby position, when it is not in operation. It moves (falls) due to its own weight.

The movable body 042SG511 is arranged at a position above the image display device 5 which is a standby position when not in operation (more precisely, in a front view, a position between the image display device 5 and the movable body 042SG401 when not in operation). At the time of operation, it moves (falls) from the standby position to the position behind the image display device 5, which is the production position, by its own weight. That is, the movable body 042SG511 is blocked by the image display device 5 by moving from the standby position to the effect position, and changes from a state visible to the player to a state invisible to the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3, an image of a specific character is printed on the front surface of the movable body 042SG511 in the characteristic portion 042SG. It should be noted that the movable body 042SG511 is provided so as to be movable only in the vertical direction (vertical direction) between the above-described standby position and the production position, and cannot be moved in other directions (for example, left-right direction or front-back direction). It has become.

The movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are arranged at the left and right end positions on the back side of the image display device 5 which is the waiting position when not in operation, and the left and right outside positions of the image display device 5 which are the rendering position from the standby position when in operation. slide to move. In other words, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are blocked by the image display device 5 when they are not in operation, so they are invisible to the player. do.

Here, the second rendering device 042SG400 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, the second rendering device 042SG400 is a rendering device arranged in front of the first rendering device 042SG300. As shown in FIG. 11-6, the second effect device 042SG400 includes a downward U-shaped substrate 042SG402 and a movable device that can fall from the standby position toward the effect position by its own weight on the front side of the substrate 042SG402 as described above. A body 042SG401 and moving means 042SG403L and 042SG403R for moving (raising) the movable body 042SG401 from the performance position to the standby position are provided.

The moving means 042SG403L and 042SG403R include guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R extending vertically and having upper and lower ends rotatably supported on the substrate 042SG402, and lifters for rotating the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R around their respective axes. and motors 042SG408L and 042SG408R. The lift motors 042SG408L, 042SG408R and the guide shafts 042SG406L, 042SG406R are connected via gear members (not shown), and the guide shafts 042SG406L, 042SG406R are driven by the lift motors 042SG408L, 042SG408R so as to rotate about their axes. It has become. Further, recessed grooves are spirally formed on the peripheral surfaces of the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R.

The guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R are provided with arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R positioned at the left and right ends of the movable body 042SG401, and driving bodies 042SG410L disposed below the arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R for moving the movable body 042SG401 from the performance position to the standby position. , 042SG410R are attached so as to be able to move up and down.

Although not shown, the arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R are provided with vertical through-holes larger in diameter than the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R. is inserted. Therefore, the movable body 042SG401 can smoothly fall from the standby position toward the performance position along the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R without being hindered by frictional force or the like.

The driving bodies 042SG410L and 042SG410R are members for supporting from below the arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R of the movable body 042SG401 that has fallen to the performance position. In the driving bodies 042SG410L and 042SG410R, through holes having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R are formed in the vertical direction. An engaging portion is formed that engages with a recessed groove formed on the surface. Furthermore, the rear surfaces of the drivers 042SG410L and 042SG410R are in contact with the front surface of the substrate 042SG402. Therefore, when the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R are rotated by driving the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG408R, the engaging portions formed in the drive members 042SG410L and 042SG410R are moved to the peripheral surfaces of the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R. By moving in the grooves formed in , the base plate 042SG402 restricts the rotation around the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R, and guides them vertically along the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R. there is

Since the moving means 042SG403L and 042SG403R are configured as described above, the movable body 042SG401 after falling to the performance position is driven by the elevator motors 042SG408L and 042SG408R to move along the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R. By 042SG410L and 042SG410R, it is conveyed from the performance position to the standby position.

As shown in FIGS. 11-6(A) and 11-6(B), solenoids for supporting the movable body 042SG401 to the standby position from below the arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R are provided at the left and right upper ends of the board 042SG402. 042SG407L and 042SG407R are provided. These solenoids 042SG407L and 042SG407R release the holding of the movable body 042SG401 by being excited. In other words, the movable body 042SG401 is held by the solenoids 042SG407L and 042SG407R at the standby position when it is not in operation, and falls from the standby position toward the production position when the solenoids 042SG407L and 042SG407R release the holding by the solenoids 042SG407L and 042SG407R when it is in operation. It's like

In addition, the falling movable body 042SG401 is finally stopped by the arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R coming into contact with the driving bodies 042SG410L and 042SG410R at the production position, but the upper surfaces of the driving bodies 042SG410L and 042SG410R in the characteristic portion 042SG are covered with rubber. Buffer portions 042SG411L and 042SG411R made of an elastic material such as material are provided. Therefore, the falling movable body 042SG401 stops when the arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R come into contact with the buffer portions 042SG411L and 042SG411R. It is designed to be able to reduce impacts and impact sounds Next, the third effect device 042SG500 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, the third rendering device 042SG500 is a rendering device arranged behind the first rendering device 042SG300. In addition, the second effect device 042SG400 includes a flat board 042SG501, a movable body 042SG511 that can fall from the standby position toward the effect position by its own weight as described above on the front side of the board 042SG501, and the front of the board 042SG501. It has movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R that can slide between a standby position and an effect position on the side. In addition, the third effect device 042SG500 includes a lifting motor 042SG512 for moving (lifting) the movable body 042SG511 between the standby position and the effect position, and the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R between the standby position and the effect position. Slide motors 042SG522L and 042SG522R for sliding movement are also provided.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 11-5, the image display device 5 is arranged on the front side of the substrate 042SG501. The image display device 5 is attached to the substrate 042SG501 via spacers 042SG531. For this reason, between the image display device 5 and the front surface of the substrate 042SG501, a gap of width L1, which is longer in the front-rear direction than the width (thickness) L2 of the movable body 042SG511 in the front-rear direction, is formed. A movable body 042SG511 can fall into the gap (movable to the performance position). Furthermore, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are arranged on the rear side of the image display device 5 by forming the gap between the image display device 5 and the front surface of the substrate 042SG501.

As shown in FIGS. 11-7(A) and 11-7(B), the rear surface of the movable body 042SG511 is formed with a projecting portion 042SG511a projecting rearward. Further, the substrate 042SG501 is formed with a long hole 042SG501a elongated in the vertical direction. The long hole 042SG501a is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and the above-described projecting portion 042SG511a is inserted from the front side. Therefore, the movable body 042SG511 can move vertically between the standby position and the performance position along the long hole 042SG511a.

A pivot 042SG501b is formed to protrude rearward on the right side of the elongated hole 042SG511a in the substrate 042SG501. Furthermore, an arm 042SG514 formed in a substantially bow shape is arranged on the back side of the substrate 042SG501. A bearing hole 042SG501b is formed at one end of the arm 042SG514, and the aforementioned pivot 042SG501b is inserted through the bearing hole 042SG501b.

Further, the other end of the arm 042SG514 is formed with a through hole 042SG514d extending in a predetermined direction, and the rear end of the projection 042SG511a is inserted through the through hole 042SG514d.

Further, the arm 042SG514 is formed with an engaging portion 274B protruding rearward. Further, on the right side of the engaging portion 042SG514b at the rear of the substrate 042SG501, a disk body 042SG513 is pivotally supported by the rotating shaft of the lifting motor 042SG512 facing the front-rear direction. A protruding portion 042SG513c is formed to face the . When the movable body 042SG511 is placed at the standby position, the projecting portion 042SG513c abuts against the engaging portion 042SG514b from the right side as shown in FIG. By preventing rotation in the clockwise direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. (maintained in the standby position).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-7(B), when the disc body 042SG513 is rotated by driving the lifting motor 042SG512 and the contact of the projecting part 042SG513c with the engaging part 042SG514b is released, the movable body 042SG511 falls from the standby position toward the performance position, and the arm 042SG514 rotates clockwise in front view in response to the falling of the movable body 042SG511.

Then, after the movable body 042SG511 moves (falls) to the performance position, the disk body 042SG513 is rotated by driving the lifting motor 042SG512, so that the projecting portion 042SG513c contacts the engaging portion 042SG514b from below. Then, the drive of the lifting motor 042SG512 continues to rotate the disk body 042SG513, and the protruding part 042SG513c pushes up the arm 042SG514 via the engaging part 042SG514b, so that the movable body 042SG511 moves from the production position to the standby position. be raised.

In addition, after the movable body 042SG511 is lifted from the rendering position to the standby position, as shown in FIG. Body 042SG511 will be maintained at the standby position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-8(A) and 11-8(B), the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R have a plurality of rearward projecting portions 042SG521aL and 042SG521aR and countless gear teeth. and rack portions 042SG501dL and 042SG501dR extending in the left and right sides.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8(B), a plurality of elongated holes 042SG531L and 042SG531R are formed in the substrate 042SG501 below the elongated holes 042SG501a. The protrusions 042SG521aL and 042SG521aR are inserted through the holes 042SG531L and 042SG531R. Therefore, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R can move in the horizontal direction between the standby position and the production position along these elongated holes 042SG531L and 042SG531R.

Slide motors 042SG522L and 042SG522R are arranged between the image display device 5 and the substrate 042SG501. Between the slide motors 042SG522L, 042SG522R and the racks 042SG501dL, 042SG501dR, there are provided a first gear pivoted on the rotation shaft of the slide motors 042SG522L, 042SG522R and a second gear meshing the racks 042SG501dL, 042SG501dR. By further meshing the first gear and the second gear, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R can be slid between the standby position and the performance position by driving the slide motors 042SG522L and 042SG522R. ing.

FIG. 11-9(A) shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 042SG. In this characteristic part 042SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is performed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ is performed. be. In addition, in this characteristic part 042SG, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation pattern, in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β, four or more super reach variation patterns such as the super reach ■ . . . may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic part 042SG is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β, It is set shorter than super reach γ. In addition, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ is executed in this characteristic part 042SG, the super reach production of super reach β is executed. The variation pattern has a longer special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed, and the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach γ is executed, The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 042SG, the degree of expectation for a big hit is set so that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach γ, super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In other words, in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-9(B) and 11-9(C), in the reach effect of the super reach in the characteristic part 042SG, the movable bodies 042SG511, 042SG521L, and 042SG521R of the third effect device 042SG500 An interlocking effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is interlocked, the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R of the first effect body 042SG300 operate (the two movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R are united at the effect position), and the second effect body 042SG400. At least one of a combination effect in which the movable body 042SG401 in the above is dropped is executed.

More specifically, the interlocking effect will be described. For example, an airplane image 042SG5a is displayed in the image display device 5 during the variable display as shown in FIGS. 11-10(A) and 11-10(B). Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-10(B) and 11-10(C), the airplane image 042SG5a is enlarged and displayed so as to approach the player as the variable display progresses. Then, at a specific timing, the movable body 042SG511 is dropped from the standby position to the performance position (the back position of the image display device 5). At this time, in conjunction with the falling of the movable body 042SG511, an image 042SG5b of the same character as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 is started to be displayed on the image display device 5, and the character appears to be waiting for the movable body 042SG511. The user moves from the position to the display screen of the image display device 5, and displays as if he or she has boarded an airplane.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11-10(D), the character image 042SG5b and the airplane image 042SG5a are continuously enlarged and displayed on the image display device 5 so as to approach the player. At the same time, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are slid from the standby position (the back position of the image display device 5) to the presentation position, so that the wings of the airplane displayed on the image display device 5 are displayed as if they were moving. Perform a production that composes. That is, in the interlocking effect, the movable body 042SG511 itself can move only in the vertical direction, while the image 042SG5b of the same character as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 approaches the player. A movement that the movable body 042SG511 cannot take is realized. By doing so, the player can be given the impression that a part of the airplane image 042SG5a displayed on the image display device 5 is approaching beyond the display area of the image display device 5. Interestingly, it seems to be able to improve.

In addition, as the interlocking effect of this characteristic part 042SG, the movable body 042SG511 is dropped from the standby position to the effect position (the back position of the image display device 5), and the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 in the image display device 5 Although the display of the image 042SG5b of the same character is started, that is, only the image corresponding to a part of the movable body 042SG511 is displayed on the image display device 5, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, in the interlocking effect, the movable body 042SG511 may be dropped from the standby position to the effect position, and the image display device 5 may start displaying an image corresponding to the entire movable body 042SG511.

Note that the coalescing effect is during the variable display as shown in FIGS. , the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R rotate and move from the standby position toward the performance position, forming an integral airplane at the performance position. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-11(B) and 11-11(C), these movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R are raised at the performance position, and the movable body 042SG is dropped.

For example, an airplane image 042SG5a is displayed in the image display device 5 . Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-10(B) and 11-10(C), the airplane image 042SG5a is directed to the player (toward the front side of the gaming machine) according to the progress of the variable display. It is displayed so that it approaches, and the specific timing movable body 042SG511 is dropped from the standby position to the effect position (back position of the image display device 5). At this time, in conjunction with the falling of the movable body 042SG511, an image 042SG5b of the same character as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 is started to be displayed on the image display device 5, and the character appears to be waiting for the movable body 042SG511. The user moves from the position to the display screen of the image display device 5, and displays as if he or she has boarded an airplane.

Regarding such interlocking effects and combined effects, as shown in FIG. In the reach performance of the super reach γ, both the interlocking performance and the united performance are executed.

As described above, in this characteristic portion 042SG, regarding the variation pattern of super reach, the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in the order of super reach γ, super reach β, and super reach α. Since it is set to , regarding whether or not continuous effects and combined effects are executed, the probability of hitting the jackpot is the highest when both the continuous effect and the combined effect are executed, and the biggest hit is when only the interlocking effect is executed. The degree of expectation is low (the degree of expectation for a big hit regarding whether or not the continuous effect and the combined effect are executed; the continuous effect and the combined effect are executed>the combined effect is executed only>the interlocking effect is executed only).

In addition, in the characterizing part 042SG of the present embodiment, the combination effect of operating the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R is executed during the variable display to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the combination effect of moving the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R may be executed as a notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit during the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and 11-12 (B), after the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a big hit during the variable display, the image display device 5 stops. The displayed jackpot pattern is highlighted a plurality of times, and the image 042SG5x of the character displayed in front of the movable body 042SG302L is displayed. At this time, the movable body 042SG302L is slightly moved from the standby position toward the performance position, and temporarily stopped at the moved position (preparation position of the movable body 042SG302L).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12(C), in the image display device 5, the stopped-displayed jackpot symbol is highlighted a plurality of times, and the character displayed in front of the movable body 042SG302R is displayed. image 042SG5y is displayed. At this time, the movable body 042SG302R is slightly moved from the standby position toward the performance position, and temporarily stopped at the moved position (preparation position of the movable body 042SG302R).

11-12(D) and 11-12(E), the character image 042SG5x displayed in front of the movable body 042SG302L in the image display device 5 and the character image 042SG5x displayed in front of the movable body 042SG302R are shown in FIGS. After moving the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R from the preparation positions toward the effect position, the movable body 042SG401 is dropped.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 042SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A movable body 042SG511 that becomes invisible to the player by moving (falling) to the back side is provided, and when the movable body 042SG511 falls, the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 in the image display device 5 is the same. The image 042SG5b of the character is displayed, and an enlarged display is performed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as if the character were to board an airplane or come close to the player. In other words, in the present characteristic portion 042SG, in conjunction with the falling of the movable body 042SG511, the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 can be displayed on the image display device 5 in ways that cannot be displayed on the movable body 042SG511. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-10, the characteristic part 042SG has a form in which the visibility of the movable body 042SG511 can be preferably lowered by dropping the movable body 042SG511 to the back side of the image display device 5. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a form of reducing the visibility of the movable body 042SG511, for example, a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on or around the movable body 042SG511, The visibility of the movable body 042SG511 may be reduced by turning off the light emitting means. Also, the movable body 042SG511 may be provided to be movable in the front-rear direction, and the visibility of the movable body 042SG511 may be reduced by moving the movable body 042SG511 backward.

Furthermore, in this characterizing portion 042SG, the form in which the visibility of the movable body 042SG511 is lowered by operating the movable body 042SG511 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the visual recognition of the movable body 042SG511 is not limited to this. The movable body that operates to lower the sex may include other movable bodies provided in the pachinko game machine 1 other than the movable body 042SG511. In other words, the movable body 042SG511 may be provided as an inoperable decorative body, and the visibility of the decorative body may be reduced by the action of another movable body, or the movable body 042SG511 and the other movable body may be operated by the action of both the movable body 042SG511 and the other movable body. The visibility of 042SG511 may be reduced.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 042SG, as shown in FIG. 11-5, both the standby position and the rendering position of the movable body 042SG511 are exemplified behind the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the visibility of the movable body 042SG511 can be reduced by moving the movable body 042SG511 to the performance position behind the image display device 5, the standby position of the movable body 042SG511 can be set as an image. It may be in front of the display device 5 .

Further, in this characterizing portion 042SG, a mode is illustrated in which the movable body 042SG511 is completely hidden (made invisible to the player) by the image display device 5 by moving the movable body 042SG511 from the standby position to the performance position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rendering position of the movable body 042SG511 may not be a position that is completely invisible to the player. In other words, in the present invention, "changing to the second specific mode, which is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the first specific mode", is achieved by moving the movable body 042SG511 from the waiting position to the rendering position, which is completely visible to the player. It includes both a form in which it is disabled and a form in which only a part of the movable body 042SG511 is invisible to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-10, in conjunction with the movement (dropping) of the movable body 042SG511 from the standby position to the effect position, the same character as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 on the image display device 5 is displayed. By displaying the image 042SG5b, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect by moving the movable body 042SG511 from the standby position to the rendering position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-10, in the interlocking effect, when the movable body 042SG511 is positioned at the standby position of the movable body 042SG511, that is, when the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 in the image display device 5 When the image 042SG5b is not displayed, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are maintained at the rear position of the image display device 5, which is the standby position of these movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R, and the character image 042SG5b is displayed on the image display device 5. If so, by moving the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R to the left and right lateral positions of the image display device 5, which are the rendering positions of these movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R and the image 042SG5b are displayed. The effect of interlocking production can be enhanced.

In this characterizing section 042SG, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are exemplified to move from the standby positions of the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R to the performance position in the interlocking performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the interlocking effect, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are changed from a second specific state difficult for the player to visually recognize according to the display of the image 042SG5b on the image display device 5 to a first state easier for the player to visually recognize than the second specific state. As long as it is an effect that changes to a specific state, the effect mode does not matter. For example, light-emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R, and when the image 042SG5b is displayed on the image display device 5, these light-emitting means are turned on to make the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R hard to be visually recognized by the player. The second specific state may be changed to a first specific state that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the second specific state.

Further, the image display device 5 is movably provided, and the movable bodies 042SG521L, 042SG521R are played by moving at least one of the movable bodies 042SG521L, 042SG521R and the image display device 5 according to the display of the image 042SG5b on the image display device 5. The second specific state, which is difficult for the player to visually recognize, may be changed to the first specific state, which is easier for the player to visually recognize than the second specific state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-12, in this characterizing portion 042SG, when the movable body 042SG302L is operated as a notification effect for notifying that the result of the variable display is a big hit during the variable display, the image display device 5, an image 042SG5x of the character displayed in front of the movable body 042SG302L is displayed. The image 042SG5y is displayed. Furthermore, when both the movable body 042SG302L and the movable body 042SG302R are operated, the image display device 5 displays both the image 042SG5x and the image 042SG5y, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the notification presentation. .

In addition, as a notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit during the variable display, as shown in FIGS. , a different image (one of the image 042SG5x and the image 042SG5y) is displayed when only the movable body 042SG302L is operated and when only the movable body 042SG302R is operated. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 042SG, the notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit during the variable display differs depending on whether only the movable body 042SG302L is operated or only the movable body 042SG302R is operated. An image is displayed on the image display device 5, and when both the movable body 042SG302L and the movable body 042SG302R are moved, both the image 042SG5x and the image 042SG5y are displayed on the image display device 5. However, the notification effect is, for example, an effect to notify that it will develop into a specific ready-to-win effect during variable display, or to notify that it will be controlled to a probability variable state after the jackpot game ends in the big win game state. It may be executed as a production or the like to be performed.

Further, as the notification effect, the image display device 5 displays images 042SG5x and 042SG5y in the same manner as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG302L and the character displayed on the movable body 042SG302R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 as the notification effect is an image that the player can recognize as an image corresponding to the movable body in motion. Any form is acceptable.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-12, in the notification effect, after the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R move to the effect position, the movable body 042SG401 falls in front of these movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the movable body 042SG401 while also attracting the player's attention, the performance effect of the movable body 042SG401 can be enhanced.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 042SG, as the notification effect, the movable body 042SG302L, 042SG302R moves to the effect position, and then the movable body 042SG401 is dropped, but the present invention is not limited to this. The falling of the body 042SG401 may be executed while the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R are moving to the performance positions, or before the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R start moving to the performance positions.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 042SG, the form of dropping the movable body 042SG511 from the standby position of the movable body 042SG511 to the performance position was exemplified as an interlocking effect. The body 042SG511 may be returned to the standby position again at a timing when it is difficult to pay attention to it. Furthermore, after falling, the movable body 042SG511 may be configured so that the process of returning the movable body 042SG511 to the standby position is difficult for the player to see by turning off light emitting means such as LEDs around the movable body 042SG511.

Furthermore, by providing the image display device 5 so as to be vertically movable or rotatable, the process of returning the movable body 042SG511 to the standby position by the moved or rotated image display device 5 may be hidden from the player.

In addition, the present embodiment also includes invention 005SG described below. That is, conventionally, there are gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines that are provided with operable movable bodies. However, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-194091, since the movable body only moves toward the display area of the display means, there is a problem that the rendering effect of the movable body rendering is insufficient. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the invention 005SG that solves the problem,
operable movable body (eg, first movable body 005SG300 shown in FIG. 10-1 of feature 005SG),
A movable body effect can be executed by moving the movable body toward the display area of the display means and displaying a specific image corresponding to the movable body on the display means (for example, in the characteristic part 005SG , The effect control CPU 120 moves the first movable part 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 toward the display area 5E in the first movable body effect, and the image display device 5 displays the first movable part 005SG301A before deforming to the contraction mode. The part that displays the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable part 005SG301B that can recognize the normal mode (see Fig. 10-15)
According to this feature, when the movable body moves from the front of the display means toward the display area, a specific image corresponding to the movable body is displayed. It is possible to enhance the effect of the movable body presentation.

In addition, the present embodiment includes invention 177SG described below. In other words, conventionally, there is a game device in which an EL display device, which is a display device, is movably provided and the EL display device is operated by a player's operation (movement). However, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-20041, since the EL display simply moves according to the player's operation, there is a problem that the presentation effect cannot be improved. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a means of invention 177SG for solving the problem,
detection means (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B) capable of detecting the action of the player;
The first movable body and the second movable body are moved based on detection of the action of the player over a predetermined period by the detection means during the effective period (for example, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B). A specific effect execution means (for example, a performance A portion where the control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10-24);
with
The specific effect execution means is
When the action of the player is detected by the detection means in the first situation, the first movable body and the second movable body are operated in the first action mode (for example, the characteristic portion As shown in FIG. 10-28 of 177SG, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. A portion that causes the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to operate at high speed and low torque),
When the motion of the player is detected by the detection means in a second situation different from the first situation, the first movable body and the second movable body are put into a second motion mode. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-28 of the characteristic portion 177SG, when the push button 31B is operated in a state in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not arranged at the origin position, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the torque priority mode to operate the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R at low speed)
A game machine characterized by is described, and according to this characteristic, the presentation effect can be improved.

In addition, the present embodiment also includes invention 005SG described below. In other words, conventionally, there is a display device capable of scroll-displaying a telop image. However, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2017-70743 has a problem that it is impossible to enhance the presentation effect. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as invention 38SH to solve the problem,
Predetermined state (for example, a state of executing a predetermined effect (super reach effect) or a state of detecting an error. Predetermined game state (low probability low base state (normal state), low probability high base state ( Time-saving state), high-probability low-base state (latent state), high-probability high-base state (probability variable state)) and controllable state control means (may be in a state controlled to a specific production mode) ( For example, in the effect control CPU120, by executing the step S172 portion to control the state of executing the super reach effect and a portion to detect an error in the game control microcomputer 100. In addition, for game control In the microcomputer 100, a portion that controls to a predetermined game state, a portion that controls to a predetermined effect mode, or a portion that executes a predetermined effect in the effect control CPU 120),
A special effect execution means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the super reach effect by performing step S172) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a super reach effect);
A display control means (for example, a part for performing a first telop effect by performing step S172 in the effect control CPU 120 that can display a display related to the predetermined state (for example, a telop display) on the display means, and a step A part that performs a second telop effect when a command indicating that an error has been detected in S75 is received)
The display control means is
During execution of the special effect, the related display can be displayed in a predetermined mode accompanied by action (for example, a first stage in which characters move at a medium speed),
Depending on the change in the mode of the special effect, the mode of the related display is changed from the predetermined mode to a special mode with a different operation speed from the predetermined mode (for example, a second stage in which the characters move at a high speed, and a special mode in which the characters move at a low speed). For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S172, so that in the first half of the super reach effect (before performing the cut-in display), the first stage One telop display 115IW10 is performed, the first telop display 115IW10 is performed in the second stage in the latter half of the super ready-to-win effect (after the cut-in display), and the first telop display 115IW10 is performed in the third stage immediately before the fluctuation stop. Do (see Figure 8-1 of characteristic part 38SG))
A game machine characterized by is described, and according to this characteristic, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the characteristic portion 115SH (FIGS. 8-1 to 8-4), the characteristic portion 005SG (FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4), the characteristic portion 177SG (FIGS. 10-1 to 10- 31), the characterizing portion 042SG (FIGS. 11-1 to 11-12) is illustrated, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 may implement a plurality of characterizing portions among these characterizing portions.

It should be noted that, when the pachinko game machine 1 is implemented for a plurality of characteristic parts, at least one movable body among the movable bodies that operate in each characteristic part may be used in common, and in each characteristic part Separate movable bodies may be used.

1 pachinko game machine 2 game board 4A first special symbol display device 4B second special symbol display device 5 image display device 11 main board 12 effect control board 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of performance identification information and controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the derivation display of a specific display result,
a first movable body operable between an origin position and a position away from the origin position ;
a second movable body operable between an origin position and a position away from the origin position at a position different from the first movable body;
display means;
a detection means capable of detecting the action of the player;
specific effect execution means for operating the first movable body and the second movable body based on the detection of the action of the player by the detection means;
with
The display means is
The first character and the second character can be displayed, and the effect identification information can be displayed in a highlighted display mode that emphasizes that the specific display result is derived and displayed,
displaying the first character when the first movable body moves in a first direction;
displaying the second character when the second movable body moves in a second direction different from the first direction;
displaying the first character and the second character when the first movable body and the second movable body move in a third direction different from the first direction and the second direction;
When the specific display result is derived and displayed, different highlighting is performed depending on whether the first movable body moves in the first direction or the second movable body moves in the second direction. The production identification information can be displayed in a form,
The specific effect execution means is
When the first movable body and the second movable body are positioned at the origin position and the motion of the player is detected by the detection means, the first movable body and the second movable body are moved. Operate in the first operation mode,
When the first movable body and the second movable body are not positioned at the origin position and the motion of the player is detected by the detection means, the first movable body and the second movable body are moved. operate in the second operation mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images